WO2025199767A1 - Multi-link device roaming-based communication method, multi-link device roaming-based context migration method, multi-link device roaming-based information conversion method and wireless communication device - Google Patents
Multi-link device roaming-based communication method, multi-link device roaming-based context migration method, multi-link device roaming-based information conversion method and wireless communication deviceInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025199767A1 WO2025199767A1 PCT/CN2024/083916 CN2024083916W WO2025199767A1 WO 2025199767 A1 WO2025199767 A1 WO 2025199767A1 CN 2024083916 W CN2024083916 W CN 2024083916W WO 2025199767 A1 WO2025199767 A1 WO 2025199767A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- mld
- information
- link
- indicate
- field
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
- H04W36/08—Reselecting an access point
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W8/00—Network data management
- H04W8/26—Network addressing or numbering for mobility support
- H04W8/28—Number portability ; Network address portability
Definitions
- Wi-Fi 7 Wireless Fidelity 7
- STA station
- MLD non-AP Multi-Link Devices
- AP access point
- MLD Multi-Link Device
- An embodiment of the present application provides a communication method based on multi-link device roaming, which is executed on an access point multi-link device AP MLD, wherein the communication method includes: a first access point multi-link device AP MLD 1 sends a first link reconfiguration frame to a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD to initiate a roaming operation, wherein the first link reconfiguration frame is used to request the non-AP MLD to roam from the AP MLD 1 to the second access point multi-link device AP MLD 2; and the AP MLD 1 receives a second link reconfiguration frame sent by the non-AP MLD to obtain a roaming result.
- An embodiment of the present application provides an information conversion method based on multi-link device roaming, which is executed on a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD, wherein the information conversion method includes: when the non-AP MLD roams between a first access point multi-link device AP MLD 1 and a second access point multi-link device AP MLD 2, converting information between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1 to adapt to the communication between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2.
- the AP MLD 1 converts the information between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1 to adapt to the communication between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming on the AP MLD 2, achieving basically uninterrupted roaming, facilitating the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2 to communicate normally as soon as possible, and shortening the roaming delay.
- a wireless communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application includes: a processor and a memory, the memory being used to store a computer program, the processor being used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to execute the above-mentioned relay communication method.
- the first node provided in an embodiment of the present application includes a processor and a memory.
- the memory is used to store a computer program
- the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to perform the above-mentioned relay communication method.
- the chip provided in the embodiment of the present application is used to implement the above-mentioned relay communication method.
- the chip includes: a processor for calling and running a computer program from a memory, so that a device equipped with the chip executes the above-mentioned relay communication method.
- Figure 1B is a schematic diagram showing non-AP MLD 1 maintaining multiple links with AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2.
- FIG1C is a schematic diagram of non-AP MLD 1 switching from AP MLD 1 to AP MLD 2 according to an embodiment of the present application;
- FIG2A is a schematic flow chart of a communication method based on multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application
- FIG2C is a schematic diagram of the format of the presence bit map subfield of a reconfigured multilink element according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG2D is a schematic diagram of a general information field format of a reconfigured multilink element provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG2E is a schematic diagram of the format of a per-site summary sub-element of a reconfiguration multilink element according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG2F is a schematic diagram of the STA control field format of the reconfiguration multilink element provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG2H is a schematic diagram of a new link ID information field in a STA information field format according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG2J is a schematic diagram of the format of the presence bitmap subfield provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG2M is a schematic diagram of the format of the STA Control field of the Basic Multilink Element provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG5A is a flow chart of a communication method based on a context migration method for multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application
- FIG5C is a flow chart of a communication method based on a context migration method for multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application
- FIG8B is a flow chart of a communication method based on multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG9B is a schematic diagram of the format of a roaming completion frame provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG10 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG11 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
- an AP can be an (EHT)AP MLD with multiple subordinate APs.
- AP MLD 1 has three subordinate APs: AP 1, AP 2, and AP 3.
- a STA can be a non-AP MLD with multiple subordinate non-AP STAs.
- non-AP MLD 1 has three subordinate non-AP STAs: non-AP STA 1, non-AP STA 2, and non-AP STA 3.
- Non-AP MLD 1 can establish multiple links with multiple subordinate APs of (EHT)AP MLD 1 through its multiple subordinate non-AP STAs, such as Link 1, Link 2, and Link 3 (see Figure 1).
- the embodiments of the present application propose the complete process of non-AP MLD performing hitless switching between AP MLDs, as well as the signaling interaction and frame structure design required to support hitless switching.
- non-AP MLD 1 Before non-AP MLD 1 moves, it establishes Link 1, Link 2, and Link 3 with (EHT) AP MLD 1 for communication. After non-AP MLD 1 moves (or the communication environment changes), non-AP MLD 1 needs to switch to the nearby (EHT) AP MLD 2. During this process, non-AP MLD 1, (EHT) AP MLD 1, or the target (EHT) AP MLD 2 may initiate roaming. When roaming is initiated, (EHT) AP MLD 1 and the target (EHT) AP MLD 2 may need to perform context migration and information conversion.
- non-AP MLD 1 roams or switches to AP MLD 1 because it moves away from (current) AP MLD 1, causing the link quality between it and AP MLD 1 to degrade (for example, the link quality RSSI, signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), or signal-to-interference-plus-noise ratio (SINR) falls below a certain threshold). Meanwhile, it moves closer to (target) AP MLD 2, making the link quality between it and AP MLD 2 sufficient to support normal communication (for example, the link quality RSSI, signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), or signal-to-interference-plus-noise ratio (SINR) exceeds a certain threshold).
- the link quality RSSI, signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), or signal-to-interference-plus-noise ratio (SINR) exceeds a certain threshold.
- Non-AP MLD initiates roaming.
- Non-AP MLD roaming method
- the non-AP MLD disconnects the multi-link connection established with AP MLD 1. In some embodiments of the present application, after the non-AP MLD establishes a multi-link connection with AP MLD 2, the non-AP MLD still maintains the multi-link connection with AP MLD 1. In some embodiments of the present application, before the non-AP MLD requests roaming from AP MLD 1, the non-AP MLD sends a first frame to AP MLD 2 and receives a second frame sent by AP MLD 2. The non-AP MLD determines whether to request roaming from AP MLD 1 based on the second frame.
- the first frame and the second frame include one of the following combinations: a request to send RTS frame and a clear to send CTS frame, a probe request frame and a probe response frame, a multilink probe request frame and a multilink probe response frame, or a fast basic service set handover FT request frame and a FT response frame.
- the non-AP MLD before the non-AP MLD requests roaming from AP MLD 1, the non-AP MLD receives a second frame sent by AP MLD 2, and the non-AP MLD determines whether to request roaming from AP MLD 1 based on the second frame.
- the second frame comprises a beacon frame.
- the non-AP MLD determining whether to request roaming from AP MLD 1 based on the second frame includes: the non-AP MLD confirming link status information between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 2 using the second frame; and/or the non-AP MLD confirming status information of AP MLD 2 using the second frame.
- the non-AP MLD requesting roaming from the AP MLD 1 includes: the non-AP MLD sending a first link reconfiguration frame to the AP MLD 1, and receiving a second link reconfiguration frame sent by the AP MLD 1.
- the non-AP MLD requesting roaming from the AP MLD 2 includes: the non-AP MLD sending a first link reconfiguration frame to the AP MLD 2, and receiving a second link reconfiguration frame sent by the AP MLD 2.
- the first link reconfiguration frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element. It should be understood that the specific implementation of the first link reconfiguration frame is not limited thereto and can be adjusted according to actual needs.
- the existence bit map subfield of the reconfigured multi-link element includes a multi-link device MLD media access control MAC address existence field, an enhanced multi-link EML capability existence field, an MLD capability and operation existence field, and/or a roaming information existence field
- the MLD MAC address existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an MLD MAC address field
- the EML capability existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an EML capability field
- the MLD capability and operation existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an MLD capability and operation field
- the roaming information existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field or link information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has a roaming information field.
- the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element includes an MLD MAC address field, an EML capability field, an MLD capability and operation field, and a roaming information field, wherein: the MLD MAC address field is used to indicate the MLD MAC address of the AP MLD 2; the EML capability field is used to indicate the enhanced multi-link information of the non-AP MLD; the MLD capability and operation field is used to indicate the multi-link capability information and operation parameters of the non-AP MLD; the roaming information field is used to indicate one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set, emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information, buffer status report BSR information, sequence number SN, data packet number PN, block acknowledgment BA session information, multi-access point AP mode, power information, target wake-up time TWT information, target wake-up time service phase R-TWT SP information, service identifier to link
- the reconfiguration multi-link element includes a per-site summary sub-element for carrying summary information of the non-AP MLD that initiated roaming.
- the per-site summary sub-element includes a STA control field, and the STA control field includes a link identifier ID field, a reconfiguration operation type field, a new link ID exists field, and/or a roaming information exists field, wherein: the link ID field is used to indicate the link ID; the new link ID exists field is used to indicate whether a new link ID information field exists in the STA information field of the reconfiguration multi-link element; and the roaming information exists field is used to indicate whether a roaming information field exists in the link information field of the reconfiguration multi-link element.
- the reconfiguration operation type field when the value indicated by the reconfiguration operation type field is 5, the reconfiguration operation type field is set to the meaning/operation of switching the link. In some embodiments of the present application, when the reconfiguration operation type field indicates switching When the Link field and/or the New Link ID Present field of the STA Control field indicates "Present", the Link ID field in the STA Control field indicates the ID of the link between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 1 being disconnected, and the New Link ID Information field indicates the ID of the link for establishing a connection between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 2.
- the new link ID information field includes a link ID field, which is used to indicate an identifier of a link, wherein the new link ID information field also includes a link ID extension field, and the link ID field and the link ID extension field jointly indicate the new link ID established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2.
- the second link reconfiguration frame includes a reconfiguration status list field.
- the reconfiguration status list field includes one or more reconfiguration status dual subfields, and the reconfiguration status dual subfield includes a link ID information field and a status field.
- the link ID information field includes a link ID subfield, and the link ID subfield indicates the link ID of the AP, indicating the addition or deletion of the link ID of the AP in the first link reconfiguration frame.
- the second link reconfiguration frame also includes a basic multilink element
- the presence bitmap field of the basic multilink element includes a roaming information presence field, wherein the roaming information presence field indicates whether a roaming information field exists in the general information field or the link information field of the basic multilink element.
- the general information field of the basic multi-link element includes an MLD MAC address field, which is used to indicate the MLD MAC address of the AP MLD 2.
- the general information field of the basic multi-link element also includes a link ID information field, a BSS parameter change count field, a media synchronization delay information field, an EML capability field, an MLD capability and operation field, an AP MLD ID field, and/or an extended MLD capability and operation field, and the contents indicated by the link ID information field, the BSS parameter change count field, the media synchronization delay information field, the EML capability field, the MLD capability and operation field, the AP MLD ID field, and/or the extended MLD capability and operation field refer to related information between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2.
- the EPCS information is used to indicate the EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or the EDCA parameter set for indicating that the non-AP MLD requests to establish an EPCS priority access permission and EPCS priority access with the AP MLD 2;
- the BSR information is used to indicate the cache status information of the non-AP MLD;
- the SN is used to indicate the SN of the frame between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1;
- the PN is used to indicate the PN that has been sent, the PN to be sent, or the PN not sent between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1;
- the BA session information is used to indicate the block confirmation session information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1;
- the multi-AP mode is used to indicate the multi-AP cooperation mode supported by the non-AP MLD;
- the power information is used to indicate the sleep policy information and/or the supported sleep mechanism of the non-AP
- the non-AP MLD After roaming is completed, the non-AP MLD establishes multiple links with AP MLD 2 (also called the target AP MLD). For example, link 2' is established between non-AP STA 2, which is subordinate to non-AP MLD 1, and AP 2, which is subordinate to AP MLD 1.
- Link 3' is established between non-AP STA 3, which is subordinate to non-AP MLD 1, and AP 3, which is subordinate to AP MLD 1.
- the non-AP MLD disconnects the multiple links (i.e., link 1, link 2, and link 3) established with AP MLD 1.
- the non-AP MLD may not be aware of whether the target AP MLD 2 in its vicinity is suitable as a roaming target, the non-AP MLD may need to send a request frame to the target AP MLD 2 before requesting roaming from the (current) AP MLD 1 (optional, as shown by the dotted line "Request Frame 1" in Figure 2B).
- the non-AP MLD uses the response frame (as shown by the dotted line "Response Frame 1" in Figure 2B) sent by the target AP MLD 2 to determine whether a roaming request can be initiated to the (current) AP MLD 1.
- the non-AP MLD's operation of sending a request frame to the target AP MLD 2 and receiving a response frame has one or more of the following effects:
- the target AP MLD 2 After the non-AP MLD sends a request frame 1 to the target AP MLD 2, the target AP MLD 2 replies with a response frame 1.
- the non-AP MLD determines whether to roam to the target AP MLD 2 based on the quality of the received response frame 1, such as the received signal strength indicator RSSI, channel state information CSI, signal-to-interference-plus-noise ratio SINR, signal-to-noise ratio SNR, and other indicators.
- the request frame 1 and response frame 1 can be one of the following combinations:
- the request frame 1 is an RTS frame
- the response frame 1 is a CTS frame.
- the request frame 1 is a probe request frame
- the response frame 1 is a probe response frame.
- the quality of the received response frame 1, for example, RSSI is greater than or equal to the first threshold (dBm).
- the first threshold may be a predefined threshold.
- the quality of the received response frame 1, for example, the relevant index of CSI is greater than or equal to the second threshold.
- the second threshold may be a predefined threshold.
- the quality of the received response frame 1, for example, SINR is greater than or equal to the third threshold (dB).
- the third threshold may be a predefined threshold.
- the quality of the received response frame 1, for example, SNR is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold (dB).
- the fourth threshold may be a predefined threshold.
- the judgment threshold may also correspond to the result of the weighted summation of some or all of the above parameters, that is, the influence weights are preconfigured for the relevant parameters, and the weighted sum is compared with the preset threshold.
- the quality of the received response frame 1, for example, RSSI is greater than or equal to the first threshold (dBm).
- the first threshold may be a predefined threshold.
- the quality of the received response frame 1, for example, CSI related indicators are greater than or equal to the second threshold.
- the second threshold may be a predefined threshold.
- the quality of the received response frame 1, for example, SINR is greater than or equal to the third threshold (dB).
- the third threshold may be a predefined threshold.
- the quality of the received response frame 1, for example, SNR is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold (dB).
- the fourth threshold may be a predefined Threshold.
- the judgment threshold may also correspond to the result of a weighted sum of some or all of the above parameters, that is, pre-configured influence weights are applied to the relevant parameters, and the weighted sum is compared with the preset threshold.
- Function 2 Confirm whether the current status of target AP MLD 2 accepts roaming from non-AP MLD.
- the target AP MLD 2 After the non-AP MLD sends a request frame 1 to the target AP MLD 2, the target AP MLD 2 replies with a response frame 1. The non-AP MLD determines whether to roam to the target AP MLD 2 based on the indication in the received response frame 1.
- the specific indication is one or more of the following fields/information in the target AP MLD 2:
- Battery status indication used to indicate whether the current battery status can still accept new non-AP MLD for roaming. For example, if the battery status indication (or power management indication) is equal to 1, it means that the device has not entered the sleep state and can accept roaming requests; if the battery status indication (or power management indication) is equal to 0, it means that the device will enter the sleep state and will not accept roaming requests for the time being; and vice versa.
- BSS load Used to indicate the load of the BSS where the current device is located. If the BSS load indicates that the load is too high, the non-AP MLD can not request roaming to the target AP MLD 2 based on this information; if the BSS load indicates that the load is low, the non-AP MLD can request roaming to the target AP MLD 2 based on this information.
- Channel load Used to indicate the load status of each channel currently supported by the device. If the channel load indicates that the load of a certain channel is too high, the non-AP MLD can not request to roam to the target AP MLD 2 based on this information, or can request to establish a new link through a channel with less load based on this information.
- Maximum total number of STAs supported used to indicate the total number of STAs/non-AP MLDs supported (or capable of being served) by the current device. If the number of STAs/non-AP MLDs being served by the current device is equal to the number indicated by the maximum total number of STAs supported, then the non-AP MLD will not roam towards the target AP MLD 2 based on this information.
- Mobility AP MLD information Indicates whether the current device is a mobility AP MLD (and the capabilities and parameters supported by it as a mobility AP MLD). If it is a mobility AP MLD, due to its limited capabilities, the non-AP MLD may not initiate a roaming request to the device in order to find a target AP MLD with more reliable communication. If it is not a mobility AP MLD, the non-AP MLD may initiate a roaming request to the device.
- the non-AP MLD obtains the status information of the target AP MLD 2 and the link status information between them. Based on this information, the non-AP MLD decides whether to request (current) AP MLD 1 to roam to the target AP MLD 2. If the non-AP MLD decides to roam to the target AP MLD 2, it sends a Link Reconfiguration Request frame (on Link 1) to (current) AP MLD 1 to initiate roaming. Then, (current) AP MLD 1 responds with a Link Reconfiguration Response frame (on Link 1) to notify the roaming result. During this process, context migration is also performed between (current) AP MLD 1 and (target) AP MLD 2. For details, see the designs of some embodiments of this application below.
- the action field format of the link reconfiguration request frame is shown in Table 2 below:
- the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element includes the Presence Bitmap subfield, the Common Info field, and the Per-STA Profile subelement, as follows:
- an embodiment of the present application proposes to define any bit (for example, bit 3) in B3 to B11 of the presence bitmap subfield of the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element) as a roaming information presence field.
- the embodiment of the present application proposes that when there is a roaming information field in the Common Info field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element in Figure 2D (that is, the roaming information presence in the Presence Bitmap subfield of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element in Figure 2C is equal to 1), the MLD MAC address in the Common Info field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element should indicate the MLD MAC address of the (target) AP MLD 2.
- Channel and bandwidth Used to indicate the channel information (including channel bandwidth, channel number, etc.) supported by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and/or the channel information (including channel bandwidth, channel number, etc.) corresponding to the new link that the non-AP MLD initiating roaming wants to establish.
- RU allocation Used to indicate the RU (index) information used by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming to communicate with the (current) AP MLD 1.
- Power Limit Used to indicate the transmit power information (such as maximum transmit power, minimum transmit power, etc.) used by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming to communicate with the (current) AP MLD 1.
- Max TX/RX Nss Used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams (Spatial Stream) supported by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming.
- EDCA parameter set used to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming, or used to indicate the EDCA parameter set established between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and (current) AP MLD 1 (the purpose of the non-AP MLD carrying the EDCA parameter set in the link reconfiguration request frame is to allow the non-AP MLD and (target) AP MLD 2 to establish a similar/new EDCA parameter set based on the EDCA parameter set).
- EPCS information used to indicate the EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming. It can also be used by the non-AP MLD to request to establish EPCS priority access permission and EDCA parameter set for EPCS priority access with (target) AP MLD 2.
- BSR related information used to indicate the cache status information of the non-AP MLD that initiated roaming (for specific details and content, see the BSR control subdomain and/or QoS control field in the IEEE 802.11 standard, including cache size, cache service type and other information).
- Multi-AP mode used to indicate the multi-AP collaboration mode supported by the non-AP MLD that initiates roaming, such as C-TDMA, C-OFDMA, C-SR, C-BF, J-TX, etc.
- Power-related information used to indicate the sleep policy information of the non-AP MLD that initiates roaming, such as the sleep window information (sleep start time, sleep duration, sleep window interval, etc.) and/or the supported sleep mechanisms.
- sleep window information sleep start time, sleep duration, sleep window interval, etc.
- TWT element Used to indicate the TWT information established between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and the (current) AP MLD 1.
- R-TWT SP used to indicate the R-TWT SP information established between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and the (current) AP MLD 1.
- TID-to-Link mapping used to indicate the establishment of a TID-to-Link mapping scheme between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and the (current) AP MLD 1, serving as a reference for TID-to-Link mapping when assisting the non-AP MLD in establishing a new link with the (target) AP MLD 2; or used to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme for establishing a new link between the non-AP MLD requesting the roaming initiation and the (target) AP MLD 2.
- FIG2E is a schematic diagram illustrating the format of a per-STA profile subelement of a reconfiguration multi-link element according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG2E illustrates the format of a per-STA profile subelement of a reconfiguration multi-link element.
- the per-STA profile subelement carries a per-STA profile of a non-AP MLD that initiates roaming.
- FIG. 2F is a schematic diagram of the STA Control field format of the Reconfiguration Multilink Element provided in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 2F, this embodiment of the present application proposes adding a new reconfiguration operation type to the reconfiguration operation types, as shown in Table 3. A reconfiguration operation type order of 5 is defined as a link switching method.
- the embodiment of the present application proposes to define any one bit (for example, Bit 15) of Bit 14 and Bit 15 (Bit 15) of the STA control field as a roaming information existence field.
- the roaming information existence is equal to 1, it represents the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)
- There is a roaming information field in the STA information field of the reconfiguration multi-link element see Figure 2G; when the roaming information field is equal to 0, it means that there is no roaming information field in the STA information field of the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element).
- the New Link ID in the STA Control field needs to be set to 1, which means that the New Link ID information (specific format is shown in Figure 2H) is present in the STA Information field (see Figure 2G) of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element.
- the Link ID field in the STA Control field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element indicates the link ID that needs to be disconnected from the (current) AP MLD 1
- the New Link ID information field (specific format is shown in Figure 2H) in the STA Information field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element indicates the link ID that needs to be established with the (target) AP MLD 2.
- the new link (corresponding to the link ID in the new link ID information field of the STA information field) is established first, and then the old link (corresponding to the link ID field of the STA control field) is disconnected.
- Figure 2H is a schematic diagram of the new link ID information field in the STA information field format provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- the specific format of the new link ID information field is shown in Figure 2H, which includes a 4-bit link ID field and a 4-bit link ID extension field, wherein the link ID field can be used to indicate the identifier of a conventional link (that is, the link ID is equal to 0 to 14).
- the link ID field and the link ID extension field jointly indicate the link ID of the new link to be established between the non-AP MLD and the (target) AP MLD 2.
- the Dialog Token field is set to the value of the Dialog Token field in the corresponding Repository Reconfiguration Request frame.
- the Count subfield is set to the number of Reconfiguration Status binaries in the Reconfiguration Status List subfield.
- the Reconfiguration Status List subfield contains one or more Reconfiguration Status binaries.
- the format of the Reconfiguration Status binary subfield is shown in Figure 2I.
- the format of the Link ID Info subfield includes a 4-bit Link ID subfield and a 4-bit reserved field.
- the Link ID subfield in the Link ID Info subfield indicates the link identifier of the AP being added or deleted in the corresponding warehouse reconfiguration request frame.
- the Status subfield indicates the status of the link reconfiguration operation for the link corresponding to the Link ID subfield, as shown in Table 5 (Status Code).
- the five status codes listed in Table 5 below are newly added in the embodiments of this application. For their specific functions, see the meaning description.
- the roaming information exists is used to indicate whether there is a roaming information field in the common information field (Common Info field) of the basic multi-link element shown in Figure 2K. For example, if the roaming information exists is equal to 0, it means that there is no roaming information field in the common information field (Common Info field) of the basic multi-link element shown in Figure 2K; if the roaming information exists is equal to 1, it means that there is a roaming information field in the common information field (Common Info field) of the basic multi-link element shown in Figure 2K.
- Channel and bandwidth used to indicate the channel information supported by (target) AP MLD 2 (including channel bandwidth, primary channel number, secondary channel number, etc.).
- RU Allocation Used to indicate the RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the (target) AP MLD 2.
- Power Limit Used to indicate the transmit power information (such as maximum transmit power, minimum transmit power, etc.) used by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming to communicate with the (target) AP MLD 2.
- Max TX/RX Nss Used to indicate the maximum number of transmit or receive spatial streams supported by (target) AP MLD 2.
- EDCA parameter set used to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming under (target) AP MLD 2.
- EPCS information used to indicate the EPCS capability information and/or subscription information supported by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming under (target) AP MLD 2. It can also be used for the non-AP MLD to establish EPCS priority access permission and EDCA parameter set for EPCS priority access with (target) AP MLD 2.
- Power-related information used to indicate the sleep policy information of the initiating (target) AP MLD 2, such as the sleep window information (sleep start time, sleep duration, sleep window interval, etc.) and/or the supported sleep mechanisms.
- TWT element Used to indicate the TWT information established between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and the (target) AP MLD 2.
- TID-to-Link mapping used to indicate the establishment of a TID-to-Link mapping scheme between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and the (target) AP MLD 2.
- Extended capability element used to indicate the extended capability information of (target) AP MLD 2. For details, see the IEEE 802.11 baseline standard specification.
- Figure 2L is a schematic diagram of the format of the Per-STA Profile subelement provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- the format of the Link Information field of the Basic Multilink element has been modified: if the "Link Information" field is present, it consists of one or more Per-STA Profile subelement(s) and other optional subelement(s).
- the format of the Per-STA Profile subelement is shown in Figure 2L.
- the STA control field format of the basic multi-link element is shown in Figure 2M.
- the embodiment of the present application proposes that any one bit in B12 to B15 is defined as a roaming information presence field.
- the roaming information presence is used to indicate whether the STA information field of the basic multi-link element shown in Figure 2N has a roaming information field. For example, if the roaming information presence is equal to 0, it means that the STA information field of the basic multi-link element shown in Figure 2N does not have a roaming information field; if the roaming information presence is equal to 1, it means that the STA information field of the basic multi-link element shown in Figure 2N has a roaming information field.
- Roaming information can exist in both the Common Info field and the STA information field of the basic multi-link element. In practice, roaming information only needs to exist in one of the two fields and does not need to be repeated.
- the non-AP MLD can also directly send a Link Reconfiguration Request frame to (target) AP MLD 2 (on Link 1, Link 2, or Link 3, with Link 2 used as an example). If (target) AP MLD 2 successfully receives the frame, it can measure the frame's reception quality (RSSI, CSI, SINR, SNR, and other indicators) and decide whether to accept the non-AP MLD's roaming request based on the frame information and (target) AP MLD 2's own status. It then responds with a Link Reconfiguration Response frame to the non-AP MLD on the link that received the Link Reconfiguration Request frame. During this process, context migration is performed between (current) AP MLD 1 and (target) AP MLD 2. For details, see the design of some embodiments of this application.
- the reception quality of the frame for example, RSSI is greater than or equal to a first threshold (dBm).
- the first threshold may be a predefined threshold.
- the reception quality of the frame for example, a related indicator of CSI is greater than or equal to a second threshold.
- the second threshold may be a predefined threshold.
- the reception quality of the frame for example, SINR is greater than or equal to a third threshold (dB).
- the third threshold may be a predefined threshold.
- the reception quality of the frame for example, SNR is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold (dB).
- the fourth threshold may be a predefined threshold.
- the judgment threshold may also correspond to the result of a weighted summation of some or all of the above parameters, that is, pre-configuring influence weights for the relevant parameters, and comparing the weighted sum with the preset threshold.
- the Link Reconfiguration Request frame format for Mode 2 is the same as that for Mode 1. The difference is that in Mode 2, the frame is sent to (target) AP MLD 2, while in Mode 1, it is sent to (current) AP MLD 1, resulting in a different RA field. Additionally, some fields in the frame format indicate different content. For example, when the Reconfiguration Operation Type in the STA Control field format of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element indicates (Sequence) 5, indicating a link switch mode, the Link ID field in the STA Control field format indicates the identifier of the newly established link, while the New Link Information field in the STA Information field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element indicates the identifier of the link to be disconnected from (current) AP MLD 1. The remaining content is consistent with the design for Mode 1 and is not further described.
- the link reconfiguration response frame format in mode 2 is the same as that in mode 1. The difference is that in mode 2, the frame is sent by (target) AP MLD 2 to non-AP MLD, while in mode 1, the frame is sent by (current) AP MLD 1 to non-AP MLD. Therefore, the TA field is different. The rest of the content is consistent with the design in mode 1 and will not be repeated here.
- Example 2 Handover (roaming) from a non-AP MLD to a target AP MLD is initiated.
- the non-AP MLD is more aware of changes in communication link quality during mobility and can promptly initiate roaming based on its location and channel status.
- the roaming initiation frame itself can also measure the signal quality between the non-AP MLD and the target AP MLD, saving additional link quality measurement time and reducing roaming latency.
- FIG3A is a flow chart of a multi-link device roaming communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the multi-link device roaming communication method is executed on an access point multi-link device (AP MLD).
- the communication method includes at least one of the following operations: Operation 301A: A first access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 1 sends a first link reconfiguration frame to a non-AP MLD to initiate roaming. The first link reconfiguration frame is used to request the non-AP MLD to roam from AP MLD 1 to a second access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 2.
- Operation 302A AP MLD 1 receives a second link reconfiguration frame sent by the non-AP MLD to obtain a roaming result.
- the AP MLD 1 sends a first link reconfiguration frame to the non-AP MLD to perform roaming. The operation is initiated, and the AP MLD 1 receives the second link reconfiguration frame sent by the non-AP MLD to obtain a roaming result, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming to the AP MLD 2 and achieving substantially uninterrupted roaming.
- the AP MLD 1 when the AP MLD 1 initiates a roaming operation or before the AP MLD 1 initiates a roaming operation, the AP MLD 1 performs context migration with the AP MLD 2.
- the first link reconfiguration frame carries the status information of the AP MLD 2.
- the communication method further includes the AP MLD 1 sending link reconfiguration confirmation information to the non-AP MLD.
- the first link reconfiguration frame and the second link reconfiguration frame include one of the following combinations: a request to send RTS frame and a clear to send CTS frame, a probe request frame and a probe response frame, a multilink probe request frame and a multilink probe response frame, or a fast basic service set switching FT request frame and an FT response frame.
- the first link reconfiguration frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element.
- the existence bit map subfield of the reconfigured multi-link element includes a multi-link device MLD media access control MAC address existence field, an enhanced multi-link EML capability existence field, an MLD capability and operation existence field, and/or a roaming information existence field
- the MLD MAC address existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an MLD MAC address field
- the EML capability existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an EML capability field
- the MLD capability and operation existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an MLD capability and operation field
- the roaming information existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field or link information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has a roaming information field.
- the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element includes an MLD MAC address field, an EML capability field, an MLD capability and operation field, and a roaming information field, wherein: the MLD MAC address field is used to indicate the MLD MAC address of the AP MLD 2; the EML capability field is used to indicate the enhanced multi-link information of the non-AP MLD; the MLD capability and operation field is used to indicate the multi-link capability information and operation parameters of the non-AP MLD; the roaming information field is used to indicate one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set, emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information, buffer status report BSR information, sequence number SN, data packet number PN, block acknowledgment BA session information, multi-access point AP mode, power information, target wake-up time TWT information, target wake-up time service phase R-TWT SP information, service identifier to link
- the channel information is used to indicate the channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or the channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD;
- the resource scheduling information is used to indicate the resource unit RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1;
- the power information is used to indicate the transmit power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1;
- the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD;
- the enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD or to indicate the EDCA parameter set established by the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1;
- the emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information is used to indicate the EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or to indicate the non-AP MLD requesting communication with the AP
- the buffer status report (BSR) information is used to indicate the buffer status information of the non-AP MLD;
- the sequence number (SN) is used to indicate the SN of the frame between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1;
- the packet number (PN) is used to indicate the PN that has been sent, is about to be sent, or has not been sent between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1;
- the block acknowledgement (BA) session information is used to indicate the block acknowledgement session information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1;
- the multi-access point (AP) mode is used to indicate the multi-AP cooperation mode supported by the non-AP MLD;
- the power information is used to indicate the sleep policy information and/or supported sleep mechanism of the non-AP MLD;
- the target wake-up time (TWT) information is used to indicate the TWT information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1;
- the target wake-up time service phase is used to indicate the TW
- the mapping of the service identifier to the link TID-to-Link is used to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or to indicate the non-AP MLD request and the AP
- the extended capability information is used to indicate the extended capability information of the non-AP MLD;
- the extremely high throughput EHT capability information is used to indicate the EHT capability information of the non-AP MLD.
- the reconfiguration multi-link element includes a per-site summary sub-element for carrying summary information of the non-AP MLD that initiated roaming.
- the per-site summary sub-element includes a STA control field, and the STA control field includes a link identifier ID field, a reconfiguration operation type field, a new link ID exists field, and/or a roaming information exists field, wherein: the link ID field is used to indicate the link ID; the new link ID exists field is used to indicate whether a new link ID information field exists in the STA information field of the reconfiguration multi-link element; and the roaming information exists field is used to indicate whether a roaming information field exists in the link information field of the reconfiguration multi-link element.
- the Reconfiguration Operation Type field when the value indicated by the Reconfiguration Operation Type field is 5, the Reconfiguration Operation Type field is set to the meaning/operation of switching links. In some embodiments of the present application, when the Reconfiguration Operation Type field indicates the Switch Link field and/or the New Link ID Existence field of the STA Control field indicates presence, the Link ID field in the STA Control field indicates the ID of the link disconnected between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 1, and the New Link ID Information field indicates the ID of the link established between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 2.
- the second link reconfiguration frame includes a reconfiguration status list field.
- the reconfiguration status list field includes one or more reconfiguration status dual subfields, each of which includes a link ID information field and a status field.
- the link ID information field includes a link ID subfield, each of which indicates a link ID of an AP, and indicates whether the link ID of the AP is added or deleted in the first link reconfiguration frame.
- the status field includes a first status code, a second status code, a third status code, a fourth status code, and/or a fifth status code
- the first status code is used to indicate that the roaming request is rejected because the BSS load of the AP MLD 2 is greater than a first set value
- the second status code is used to indicate that the roaming request is rejected because the channel load for establishing a link is greater than a second set value
- the third status code is used to indicate that the roaming request is rejected because the time for requesting to establish a link does not match the window in which the AP MLD 2 is allowed to establish a link
- the fourth status code is used to indicate that the roaming request will enter a sleep state and will not accept roaming requests for the time being
- the fifth status code is used to indicate that the roaming request is rejected because the AP MLD 2 has reached the maximum number of supported STAs/non-AP MLDs.
- the second link reconfiguration frame further includes a basic multilink element, wherein the presence bitmap field of the basic multilink element includes a roaming information presence field, wherein the roaming information presence field is used to indicate whether a roaming information field exists in the general information field or link information field of the basic multilink element.
- the general information field of the basic multilink element includes an MLD MAC address field, which is used to indicate the MLD MAC address of AP MLD 2.
- the roaming information field is used to indicate one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, EDCA parameter set, EPCS information, BSR information, SN, PN, BA session information, multi-AP mode, power information, TWT information, R-TWT SP information, TID-to-Link mapping, extended capability information, and EHT capability information, wherein: the channel information is used to indicate the channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD; the resource scheduling information is used to indicate RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the power information is used to indicate transmit power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD; the EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the ED
- Step 3 If target AP MLD 2 receives the request frame 1 sent by the non-AP MLD in step 2, it replies with a response frame 1 to the non-AP MLD on the link that received the request frame 1.
- the non-AP MLD determines whether to roam to target AP MLD 2 based on the quality of the received response frame 1 (such as RSSI, CSI, SINR, SNR, etc.).
- the request frame 1 and the response frame 1 can be one of the following combinations:
- the request frame 1 is an RTS frame
- the response frame 1 is a CTS frame.
- the request frame 1 is a probe request frame
- the response frame 1 is a probe response frame.
- the request frame 1 is a multi-link detection request frame
- the response frame 1 is a multi-link detection response frame.
- the request frame 1 is an FT request frame
- the response frame 1 is an FT response frame.
- the quality of the received response frame 1, for example, RSSI is greater than or equal to the first threshold (dBm).
- the first threshold may be a predefined threshold.
- the quality of the received response frame 1, for example, the relevant index of CSI is greater than or equal to the second threshold.
- the second threshold may be a predefined threshold.
- the quality of the received response frame 1, for example, SINR is greater than or equal to the third threshold (dB).
- the third threshold may be a predefined threshold.
- the quality of the received response frame 1, for example, SNR is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold (dB).
- the fourth threshold may be a predefined threshold.
- the judgment threshold may also correspond to the result of the weighted summation of some or all of the above parameters, that is, the influence weights are preconfigured for the relevant parameters, and the weighted sum is compared with the preset threshold.
- the Link Reconfiguration Request frame format in this embodiment is the same as that in Example 1.
- the Link Reconfiguration Request frame is sent from (current) AP MLD 1 to the non-AP MLD, so the TA and RA fields are different.
- the remaining fields and their corresponding meanings are detailed in the design of Example 1 and are not repeated here.
- the difference from Example 1 is that the fields in this frame format indicate the content corresponding to (target) AP MLD 2.
- Example 3 Handover (roaming) from the current AP MLD to the non-AP MLD is initiated.
- the current AP MLD can promptly learn the link quality between the current and non-AP MLD while receiving data/signals from the non-AP MLD, helping the non-AP MLD initiate roaming. This allows the current AP MLD to initiate roaming earlier than the non-AP MLD, reducing roaming latency.
- the current AP MLD can, based on environmental information (e.g., the non-AP MLD's channel state information, target AP MLD load information, etc.), ensure that the non-AP MLD is served by a more appropriate target AP MLD (with a lighter load), achieving load balancing to a certain extent.
- environmental information e.g., the non-AP MLD's channel state information, target AP MLD load information, etc.
- FIG4A is a flow chart of a multi-link device roaming communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the multi-link device roaming communication method is executed on an access point multi-link device (AP MLD).
- the communication method includes at least one of the following operations: Operation 401A: The second access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 2 sends a first link reconfiguration frame to a non-AP MLD to initiate roaming. The first link reconfiguration frame is used to request the non-AP MLD to roam from the first access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 1 to the AP MLD 2.
- Operation 402A The AP MLD 2 receives the second link reconfiguration frame sent by the non-AP MLD to obtain a roaming result.
- the AP MLD 2 sends a first link reconfiguration frame to the non-AP MLD to initiate roaming, and the AP MLD 2 receives a second link reconfiguration frame sent by the non-AP MLD to obtain the roaming result, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming on the AP MLD 2 and achieving basically uninterrupted roaming.
- AP MLD 2 when AP MLD 2 initiates roaming or before AP MLD 2 initiates roaming, AP MLD 2 performs context migration with AP MLD 1.
- AP MLD 2 sends the first link reconfiguration frame to the non-AP MLD to request link switching.
- the first link reconfiguration frame includes information about disconnecting the link between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 1 and establishing a link between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 2.
- AP MLD 2 sends the first link reconfiguration frame to the non-AP MLD to request adding a link.
- the first link reconfiguration frame includes information about establishing a link between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 2.
- the first link reconfiguration frame and the second link reconfiguration frame include one of the following combinations: a request to send (RTS) frame and a clear to send (CTS) frame, a probe request frame and a probe response frame, a multilink probe request frame and a multilink probe response frame, or a fast basic service set switching (FT) request frame and a fast basic service set switching (FT) response frame.
- the first link reconfiguration frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element.
- the existence bit map subfield of the reconfigured multi-link element includes a multi-link device MLD media access control MAC address existence field, an enhanced multi-link EML capability existence field, an MLD capability and operation existence field, and/or a roaming information existence field
- the MLD MAC address existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an MLD MAC address field
- the EML capability existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an EML capability field
- the MLD capability and operation existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an MLD capability and operation field
- the roaming information existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field or link information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has a roaming information field.
- the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element includes an MLD MAC address field, an EML capability field, an MLD capability and operation field, and a roaming information field, wherein: the MLD MAC address field is used to indicate the MLD MAC address of the AP MLD 2; the EML capability field is used to indicate the enhanced multi-link information of the non-AP MLD; the MLD capability and operation field is used to indicate the multi-link capability information and operation parameters of the non-AP MLD; the roaming information field is used to indicate one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set, emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information, buffer status report BSR information, sequence number SN, data packet number PN, block acknowledgment BA session information, multi-access point AP mode, power information, target wake-up time TWT information, target wake-up time service phase R-TWT SP information, service identifier to link
- the channel information is used to indicate the channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or the channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD;
- the resource scheduling information is used to indicate the resource unit RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1;
- the power information is used to indicate the transmission power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1;
- the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD;
- the enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD.
- the EDCA parameter set may be used to indicate the EDCA parameter set established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1;
- the emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information may be used to indicate the EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or may be used to indicate the EDCA parameter set that the non-AP MLD requests to establish an EPCS priority access permission and EPCS priority access with the AP MLD 2;
- the buffer status report BSR information may be used to indicate the buffer status information of the non-AP MLD;
- the sequence number SN may be used to indicate the SN of the frame between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1;
- the data packet number PN is used to indicate the PN that has been sent between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or the PN that is about to be sent, or the PN that has not been sent;
- the block acknowledgment BA session information is used to indicate the block acknowledgment session information established between the non
- the link ID field in the STA control field indicates the link ID of the link between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1 being disconnected
- the new link ID information field indicates the link ID of the link established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2.
- the second link reconfiguration frame further includes a basic multilink element
- the presence bitmap field of the basic multilink element includes a roaming information presence field, wherein the roaming information presence field is used to indicate whether a roaming information field exists in the general information field or the link information field of the basic multilink element.
- the roaming information field is used to indicate one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, EDCA parameter set, EPCS information, BSR information, SN, PN, BA session information, multi-AP mode, power information, TWT information, R-TWT SP information, TID-to-Link mapping, extended capability information, and EHT capability information, wherein: the channel information is used to indicate the channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or the channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD; the resource scheduling information is used to indicate the RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the power information Used to indicate the transmit power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD; the EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the following information: channel information, resource scheduling
- Example 4 Method for target AP MLD to initiate roaming:
- (target) AP MLD 2 initiates roaming (for the non-AP MLD), or before initiating roaming (for the non-AP MLD), it first performs context migration with the (current) AP MLD 1 (see some embodiments of this application for details).
- the link reconfiguration request frame format sent by (target) AP MLD 2 on link 2' to be established is consistent with the link reconfiguration request frame format in Example 1.
- the reconfiguration operation type in the STA Control field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element is set to (order) 5, indicating the link switching type. Therefore, the New Link ID field in the STA Control field must be set to 1, which means that the STA Information field (see FIG. 2G ) of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element contains new link ID information (the specific format is shown in FIG. 2H ).
- the Link ID field in the STA Control field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element indicates the link ID of the link to be disconnected from (current) AP MLD 1
- the New Link ID field (the specific format is shown in FIG. 2H ) in the STA Information field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element indicates the link ID of the link to be established with (target) AP MLD 2.
- the remaining fields are similar to the previous design and will not be repeated here.
- the non-AP MLD then replies with a link reconfiguration response frame to the (target) AP MLD 2 on the link where the link reconfiguration request frame was received.
- the fields of this frame are similar to the previous design and will not be repeated here.
- Method 2 (Target) AP MLD 2 requests to add a link (add link) with non-AP MLD, and then non-AP MLD requests to delete a link (delete link) with (current) AP MLD 1:
- the link reconfiguration request frame format sent by (target) AP MLD 2 to the non-AP MLD on link 2' to be established, and the link reconfiguration request frame format sent by the non-AP MLD to the (current) AP MLD 1 on link 1, can be in the link reconfiguration request frame format specified in the IEEE 802.11be standard or in the link reconfiguration request frame format specified in Example 1.
- the specific operations in this mode are as follows:
- (target) AP MLD 2 sends a link reconfiguration request frame to the non-AP MLD on the link 2’ to be established, in which the reconfiguration operation type (Reconfiguration Operation Type) in the STA control field of the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element) is set to (order) 2, that is, the type of adding a link (Add Link).
- the reconfiguration operation type (Reconfiguration Operation Type) in the STA control field of the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element) is set to (order) 2, that is, the type of adding a link (Add Link).
- the link ID field of the STA control field is set to the identifier of the new link requested by (target) AP MLD 2 to establish a new link with the non-AP MLD; the non-AP MLD replies with a link reconfiguration response frame to the (target) AP MLD 2 on the link on which it receives the link reconfiguration request frame, indicating whether it accepts the newly established link and other information.
- the non-AP MLD sends a Link Reconfiguration Request frame to the (current) AP MLD 1 on link 1, in which the Reconfiguration Operation Type in the STA Control field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element is set to (order) 3, that is, the type of Delete Link.
- the Link ID field of the STA Control field is set to the identifier of the link that the non-AP MLD requests to be deleted by the (current) AP MLD 1; the (current) AP MLD 1 replies with a Link Reconfiguration Response frame to the non-AP MLD on the link on which it received the Link Reconfiguration Request frame, indicating the result of the link deletion and other information.
- Method 3 (Target) AP MLD 2 requests to add a link with non-AP MLD, and then (current) AP MLD 1 requests to delete a link with non-AP MLD:
- a backhaul connection can be established between AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2 during the context migration operation, so AP MLD 1 can know that AP MLD 2 and Non-AP MLD are making roaming requests, and thus make a request to delete the link.
- mode 3 the exchange of link reconfiguration request frames and link reconfiguration response frames between (target) AP MLD 2 and non-AP MLD, as well as the resulting effects, are consistent with those in mode 2 in the above implementation and will not be described in detail.
- mode 3 is (current) AP MLD 1 proactively requests to disconnect the link with the non-AP MLD.
- the details are as follows:
- (Current) AP MLD 1 sends a Link Reconfiguration Request frame to the non-AP MLD, in which the Reconfiguration Operation Type in the STA Control field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element is set to (Sequence) 3, that is, the type of Delete Link. Then the Link ID field of the STA Control field is set to the identifier of the link that (Current) AP MLD 1 requests the non-AP MLD to delete. The non-AP MLD replies with a Link Reconfiguration Response frame to the (Current) AP MLD 1 to indicate the result of the link deletion and other information.
- the Reconfiguration Operation Type in the STA Control field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element is set to (Sequence) 3, that is, the type of Delete Link.
- the Link ID field of the STA Control field is set to the identifier of the link that (Current) AP MLD 1 requests the non-AP MLD to delete.
- the non-AP MLD replies with a
- the target AP MLD initiates a (roaming) AP MLD handover to the non-AP MLD.
- the target AP MLD can directly carry the configuration/parameters to be generated in the roaming request frame.
- Communication-related parameters can be configured during the new link establishment process, saving roaming time.
- Embodiments 1 to 4 design a roaming method based on a link reconfiguration request frame and a link reconfiguration response frame.
- the embodiments of the present application propose to design a roaming timer.
- the timer is used to constrain the time interval between the sender sending the link reconfiguration request frame and the responder sending the link reconfiguration response frame. For example, after the sender sends the link reconfiguration request frame, the countdown of the roaming timer is immediately started.
- the sender determines whether the roaming (or link switching) is completed according to the instructions of the link reconfiguration response frame. If the link reconfiguration response frame sent by the responder is not received within the time corresponding to the roaming timer, the sender considers that the roaming (or link switching) has failed. If the roaming operation needs to be continued, the sender can wait and try again or find another target) AP MLD to roam.
- FIG5A is a flow chart illustrating a communication method for a context migration method based on multi-link device roaming provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the context migration method based on multi-link device roaming is executed on an access point multi-link device (AP MLD).
- the context migration method includes at least one of the following operations: Operation 501A: A first access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 1 establishes a backhaul link with a second access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 2; Operation 502A: AP MLD 1 exchanges context migration information with AP MLD 2 via the backhaul link.
- the AP MLD 1 exchanges context migration information with the AP MLD 2 through the backhaul link, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming on the AP MLD 2, achieving basically uninterrupted roaming, and allowing AP MLD 2 to reserve data and configure communications for the non-AP MLD in advance, further reducing roaming latency.
- the backhaul link is a wireless backhaul link.
- the context migration information includes a first frame and a second frame, the first frame being used to convey information about a non-AP MLD roaming between AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2, and the second frame confirming the receipt of the first frame, modifying or suggesting information carried by the first frame, and/or carrying information requested by the first frame.
- the context migration information includes a first frame and a response frame, the first frame being an action frame being used to convey information about a non-AP MLD roaming between AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2, and the response frame being used to respond to the receipt of the first frame.
- the context migration information includes a first frame, the first frame being an action frame being used to convey information about a non-AP MLD roaming between AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2, and the receiver does not need to confirm receipt of the action frame.
- the first frame is used to indicate one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set, emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information, buffer status report BSR information, sequence number SN, data packet number PN, block acknowledgment BA session information, multi-access point AP mode, power information, target wake-up time TWT information, limited target wake-up time service phase R-TWT SP information, service identifier to link TID-to-Link mapping, extended capability information, extremely high throughput EHT capability information, enhanced multi-link EML capability information, MLD capability and operation information, new link ID, and data to be transmitted.
- the channel information is used to indicate the channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or the channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD;
- the resource scheduling information is used to indicate the resource unit RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1;
- the power information is used to indicate the transmit power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1;
- the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD;
- the EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD.
- the EPCS information is used to indicate the EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or is used to indicate the EDCA parameter set for the non-AP MLD to request the non-AP MLD to establish an EPCS priority access permission and EPCS priority access with the AP MLD 2;
- the BSR information is used to indicate the cache status information of the non-AP MLD;
- the SN is used to indicate the SN of the frame between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1;
- the PN is used to indicate the PN that has been sent, the PN to be sent, or the PN that has not been sent between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1;
- the BA session information is used to indicate the block confirmation session information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1;
- the channel information is used to indicate the channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or the channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD;
- the resource scheduling information is used to indicate the resource unit RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1;
- the power information is used to indicate the transmission power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1;
- the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD;
- the EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD or to indicate the number of transmit/receive spatial streams used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1.
- the EPCS information is used to indicate the EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or to indicate that the non-AP MLD requests to establish an EPCS priority access permission and an EDCA parameter set for EPCS priority access with the AP MLD 2;
- the BSR information is used to indicate the cache status information of the non-AP MLD;
- the SN is used to indicate the SN of the frame between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1;
- the PN is used to indicate the PN that has been sent, the PN that is about to be sent, or the PN that has not been sent between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1;
- the BA session information is used to indicate the PN of the non-AP MLD.
- Example 5 Wireless backhaul between APs and MLDs:
- a link must be established between the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD first (i.e., Multi-Link Setup is completed).
- This embodiment uses the link established between the subordinate AP 3 of (current) AP MLD 1 and the subordinate AP 3 of (target) AP MLD 2 as an example for description as the backhaul link, but the present application is not limited thereto.
- frames used for context migration between the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD can be implemented in the following three ways according to their types.
- Request Frame 2 Reject and/or make suggestions for the information sent in Request Frame 2 (i.e., modify the information carried in Request Frame 2 or suggest more appropriate information). Also carry parameters/information of (target) AP MLD 2 (i.e., carry the information requested in Request Frame 2, etc.).
- (current) AP MLD 1 sends a request frame 2 to (target) AP MLD 2, and (target) AP MLD 2 responds with a response frame 2. It can also be that (target) AP MLD 2 sends a request frame 2 to (current) AP MLD 1, and (current) AP MLD 1 responds with a response frame 2.
- (target) AP MLD 2 After receiving Request Frame 2, (target) AP MLD 2 responds with an acknowledgment frame (Ack frame) to (current) AP MLD 1 after a predetermined interval (e.g., a Short Interframe Space (SIFS) duration, although this embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto and may also be other durations, such as a Priority Interframe Space (PIFS)).
- a predetermined interval e.g., a Short Interframe Space (SIFS) duration, although this embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto and may also be other durations, such as a Priority Interframe Space (PIFS)
- the acknowledgment frame (Ack frame) merely confirms the successful receipt of the information sent in Request Frame 2 (i.e., implicitly accepts the information carried in Request Frame 2).
- Request Frame 2 is designed as an Action No Ack (indicated by the Frame Control field).
- (current) AP MLD 1 sends Request Frame 2 to (target) AP MLD 2, requesting that the parameters/information of the non-AP MLD that is about to initiate roaming be transferred to (target) AP MLD 2.
- the sender assumes that the receiver has successfully received and accepted the information carried in Request Frame 2.
- the request frame 2 for context migration may include some or all of the information carried by the link reconfiguration request frame in some of the above embodiments.
- the request frame 2 may include one or more of the following information of non-AP MLD: channel and bandwidth, RU allocation, Power limit, Max TX/RX Nss, EDCA parameter set, EPCS information, BSR-related information, SN (Sequence Number), PN (Packet Number), BA session, multi-AP mode, power-related information, TWT element, R-TWT-related information, TID-to-Link mapping, extended capability element, EHT capability element, EML capability field, MLD capabilities and operations, new link ID, and pending data (Pending Data): unsent data buffered downlink by the current AP MLD to the non-AP MLD to which roaming is to begin.
- Pending Data unsent data buffered downlink by the current AP MLD to the non-AP MLD to which roaming is to begin.
- the information exchange between the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD not only allows the non-AP MLD to seamlessly connect to the target AP MLD while maintaining State 4, but also allows the target AP MLD to reserve data and configure communications for the non-AP MLD in advance, further reducing roaming latency.
- the information between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1 includes one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set, emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information, buffer status report BSR information, sequence number SN, data packet number PN, block confirmation BA session information, multi-access point AP mode, power information, target wake-up time TWT information, target wake-up time service phase R-TWT SP information, service identifier to link TID-to-Link mapping, extended capability information, Extremely high throughput (EHT) capability information, enhanced multi-link (EML) capability information, MLD capability and operation information, and new link ID.
- EHT Extremely high throughput
- EML enhanced multi-link
- the channel information is used to indicate the channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or the channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD;
- the resource scheduling information is used to indicate the resource unit RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1;
- the power information is used to indicate the transmit power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1;
- the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD;
- the EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD or to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD.
- Channel and bandwidth Because the channel configurations of the BSSs where (current) AP MLD 1 and (target) AP MLD 2 are located (for example, the channel number of the main 20 MHz channel, the working bandwidth, etc.) may be inconsistent, after the non-AP MLD switches to the (target) AP MLD 2, the (target) AP MLD 2 needs to reconfigure the working channel for the non-AP MLD based on the channel configuration of its own BSS.
- the non-AP MLD notifies the non-AP MLD to switch its main 20 MHz channel to the main 20 MHz channel of the BSS where the target AP MLD 2 is located; and notifies the non-AP MLD to update the working bandwidth to the bandwidth corresponding to the intersection of "channels supported by the non-AP MLD" and "channels supported by the (target) AP MLD 2".
- RU Allocation Because the channel configurations (e.g., primary 20 MHz channel number, operating bandwidth, etc.) of the BSSs in which (current) AP MLD 1 and (target) AP MLD 2 reside may be inconsistent, the RUs (indexes) allocated to the non-AP MLD operating under (current) AP MLD 1 may become unavailable after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to reassign RUs (indexes) to the non-AP MLD based on the channel configuration of its own BSS, for example, by updating the RUs (indexes) for the non-AP MLD.
- the channel configurations e.g., primary 20 MHz channel number, operating bandwidth, etc.
- the transmit power limits e.g., maximum and minimum transmit power
- the power limit used by the non-AP MLD under (current) AP MLD 1 may not be compatible after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to reassign the transmit power limit to the non-AP MLD based on the transmit power limit of the associated non-AP MLD that it can accept.
- Max TX/RX Nss Because the maximum number of transmit or receive spatial streams (Nss) supported by (current) AP MLD 1 and (target) AP MLD 2 may differ, the Nss used by the non-AP MLD under (current) AP MLD 1 may not match after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to set the maximum TX/RX Nss that the non-AP MLD can use based on its own Max TX/TX Nss.
- the EDCA parameter set configuration (such as access category (AC), maximum contention window (CWmax), maximum contention window (CWmin), backoff counter (BCC), arbitrary interframe number (AIFSN), and maximum transmission opportunity time (TXOP limit)) when the non-AP MLD communicates with the (current) AP MLD 1 may not be applicable to the non-AP MLD communicating with the (target) AP MLD 2. Because of the communication issues, the EDCA parameter set assigned to the non-AP MLD operating under (current) AP MLD 1 may need to be updated after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to reassign the EDCA parameter set to the non-AP MLD based on its own operating status. For example, it needs to set new parameters such as the access category (AC), maximum contention window (CWmax), maximum contention window (CWmin), backoff counter, arbitrary interframe number (AIFSN), and maximum transmission opportunity time (TXOP limit).
- AC access category
- CWmax maximum contention window
- EPCS information includes the subscription status and activation status of the EPCS priority access service, as well as the EDCA parameter set for EPCS priority access.
- the EPCS information configuration e.g., subscription status, activation status, EDCA parameter set for EPCS priority access
- the EPCS subscription status and activation status are transferred to (target) AP MLD 2 (no conversion or update is required).
- the EDCA parameter set for EPCS priority access may need to be updated by (target) AP MLD 2 based on its operating status.
- SN is the sequence number of the frame sent by the sender.
- the SN of the Non-AP MLD communicating with (current) AP MLD 1 can have two migration strategies when switching to (target) AP MLD 2:
- PN Packet Number
- PN is used to number MSDUs, A-MSDUs, and MPDUs.
- the PN corresponding to the packet when the Non-AP MLD communicates with (current) AP MLD 1 can have two migration strategies when switching to (target) AP MLD 2:
- BA-related information Used to indicate the BlockAck session information established by the sender and receiver, such as the BA agreement and BA scoreboarding. For details, see the IEEE 802.11 standard.
- the BA agreement and BA scoreboard can have two migration strategies:
- Power-related information when the Non-AP MLD communicates with (current) AP MLD 1
- the sleep policy established by the non-AP MLD when operating under (current) AP MLD 1 may not be applicable to communication with (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, the sleep policy established by the non-AP MLD when operating under (current) AP MLD 1 may need to be updated after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to reassign the sleep policy to the non-AP MLD based on its own operating status.
- the TWT SP established by the non-AP MLD when communicating with (current) AP MLD 1 may not be applicable to the non-AP MLD's communication with (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, the TWT SP established by the non-AP MLD when operating under (current) AP MLD 1 may need to be updated after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to re-establish the TWT SP for the non-AP MLD based on its own operating status.
- the TID-to-Link mapping used by the non-AP MLD when communicating with (current) AP MLD 1 may not be applicable to the communication between the non-AP MLD and (target) AP MLD 2, for example, if a link on (target) AP MLD 2 is unavailable or overloaded and cannot carry more TIDs. Therefore, the TID-to-Link mapping used by the non-AP MLD when operating under (current) AP MLD 1 may need to be updated after switching to (target) AP MLD 2.
- (target) AP MLD 2 needs to re-map the TID-to-Link mapping for the non-AP MLD based on its own operating status, for example, remapping some TIDs to the new Link ID while retaining other TIDs mapped to the old Link ID.
- EHT Capability Element Because the Extreme Throughput (EHT) capabilities supported by (current) AP MLD 1 and (target) AP MLD 2 may differ, some Extreme Throughput (EHT) capabilities used by non-AP MLD under (current) AP MLD 1 may not be compatible after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to configure the Extreme Throughput (EHT) capabilities that non-AP MLD can use based on its own extended capability information.
- EHT Extreme Throughput
- the Link ID established when the non-AP MLD communicates with (current) AP MLD 1 may not be suitable for communication between the non-AP MLD and (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, the Link ID used by the non-AP MLD under (current) AP MLD 1 may need to be updated after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to reassign a Link ID to the non-AP MLD based on its existing Link ID. For example, it can use the Link ID currently unassigned by (target) AP MLD 2 for the new link established between the non-AP MLD and (target) AP MLD 2 after the handover.
- the effect that can be achieved by this embodiment is as follows: When the Non-AP MLD switches to the target AP MLD, the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD update/reconfigure some contexts, which can facilitate normal communication between the non-AP MLD and the target AP MLD as soon as possible and shorten the roaming delay.
- FIG7A is a flow chart illustrating a multi-link device roaming communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
- the multi-link device roaming communication method is performed by a non-AP MLD.
- the communication method includes at least one of the following operations: Operation 701A: After the non-AP MLD roams from a first access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 1 to a second access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 2, the non-AP MLD confirms the roaming result.
- AP MLD access point multi-link device
- AP MLD access point multi-link device
- the non-AP MLD confirms the roaming result, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming the AP MLD 2 and achieving basically uninterrupted roaming.
- the confirmation operation performed by the non-AP MLD after the roaming is completed can ensure that the newly established link of the non-AP MLD after roaming the AP MLD 2 works normally.
- the non-AP MLD confirming the roaming result includes: the non-AP MLD sending a roaming confirmation message to AP MLD 2 and receiving a roaming response message from AP MLD 2.
- the non-AP MLD after the non-AP MLD receives the roaming response message from AP MLD 2, the non-AP MLD sends a roaming completion message to AP MLD 1.
- the roaming completion message includes a roaming MLD address field for indicating the MLD MAC address of the non-AP MLD that completed the roaming.
- the roaming confirmation information and the roaming response information include one of the following combinations: a request to send RTS frame and a clear to send CTS frame, a probe request frame and a probe response frame, a multi-link probe request frame and a multi-link probe response frame, a buffer status report polling BSRP trigger frame and a triggered physical layer protocol data unit TB PPDU with a buffer status report BSR, a multi-user request to send frame MU-RTS trigger frame and a CTS frame, or a data frame and a response frame.
- the frame body of the roaming confirmation information carries the converted non-AP MLD and the The information between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1 after the conversion is adapted to communication between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2.
- the information between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1 after the conversion includes one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, enhanced distributed channel access (EDCA) parameter set, emergency preparedness communication service (EPCS) information, buffer status report (BSR) information, sequence number (SN), packet number (PN), block acknowledgement (BA) session information, multi-access point (AP) mode, power information, target wake time (TWT) information, restricted target wake time service phase (R-TWT) information, service identifier to link (TID-to-Link) mapping, extended capability information, extremely high throughput (EHT) capability information, enhanced multi-link (EML) capability information, MLD capability and operation information, and a new link ID.
- EDCA enhanced distributed channel access
- EPCS emergency preparedness communication service
- BSR buffer status report
- SN sequence number
- PN packet number
- BA block acknowledgement
- AP multi-access point
- TWT target wake time
- the channel information is used to indicate channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD;
- the resource scheduling information is used to indicate resource unit RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1;
- the power information is used to indicate transmit power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1;
- the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD;
- the EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD or to indicate the EDCA parameter set established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1;
- the EPCS information is used to indicate EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information, and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or to indicate the EDCA parameter set for the non-AP MLD to request to establish EPCS priority access permission and EPCS priority
- the communication method also includes the non-AP MLD performing one or more of the following operations according to the roaming confirmation information: switching the working main channel and working bandwidth to the main channel number and working bandwidth indicated by the AP MLD 2; adjusting the clock information to the clock information of the AP MLD 2; preparing channel access parameters according to the EDCA parameter set indicated by the AP MLD 2; setting the EPCS priority access to an on/off state according to the EPCS information indicated by the AP MLD 2, and if it is in the on state, it is also necessary to perform competitive transmission of EPCS services according to the EDCA parameter set of the EPCS priority access indicated by the AP MLD 2; marking the SN of the next frame communicated with the AP MLD 2 according to the SN indicated by the AP MLD 2; marking the PN of the next media access control protocol data unit MPDU communicated with the AP MLD 2 according to the PN indicated by the AP MLD 2; and The BA scoreboard of the next data transmission communicated with the
- Example 8 Method for non-AP MLD to confirm roaming:
- Option 1 After receiving the roaming acknowledgment frame (Ack frame) from (target) AP MLD 2, the non-AP MLD sends a roaming completion frame to (current) AP MLD 1 on link 1.
- Ack frame the roaming acknowledgment frame
- Option 2 After (target) AP MLD 2 responds with a roaming acknowledgment frame (Ack frame) to the non-AP MLD, it sends a roaming completion frame to (current) AP MLD 1 via the backhaul link.
- Ack frame a roaming acknowledgment frame
- the (current) AP MLD 1 can immediately disconnect (delete link) from the non-AP MLD that is switched to the (target) AP MLD 2, and delete the context information related to the non-AP MLD (see the design of the previous embodiment for specific information).
- the confirmation operation performed by the non-AP MLD after roaming is completed can ensure that the newly established link of the non-AP MLD works normally after switching to (target) AP MLD 2, and can also ensure that the non-AP MLD disconnects from the (current) AP MLD 1 after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. In addition, it is also used to announce that the next (target) AP MLD 2 will continue to serve the non-AP MLD.
- FIG8A is a flow chart illustrating a multi-link device roaming communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
- the multi-link device roaming communication method is executed by an access point multi-link device (AP MLD), wherein the communication method includes at least one of the following operations: Operation 801A: After a non-AP MLD roams from a first access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 1 to a second access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 2, AP MLD 2 confirms the roaming result.
- AP MLD access point multi-link device
- the AP MLD 2 confirms the roaming result, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming on the AP MLD 2 and achieving basically uninterrupted roaming.
- the confirmation operation performed by the AP MLD 2 after the roaming is completed can ensure that the newly established link of the non-AP MLD after roaming on the AP MLD 2 works normally.
- AP MLD 2 confirming the roaming result includes: AP MLD 2 sending a roaming confirmation message to the non-AP MLD and receiving a roaming response message from the non-AP MLD.
- AP MLD 2 sends a roaming completion message to AP MLD 1.
- the roaming completion message includes a roaming MLD address field for indicating the MLD MAC address of the non-AP MLD that completed the roaming.
- the roaming confirmation message and the roaming response message include one of the following combinations: a request-to-send (RTS) frame and a clear-to-send (CTS) frame, a probe request frame and a probe response frame, a multilink probe request frame and a multilink probe response frame, a buffer status report poll (BSRP) trigger frame and a trigger-based physical layer protocol data unit (TB) PPDU with a buffer status report (BSR), a multi-user request-to-send (MU-RTS) trigger frame and a CTS frame, or a data frame and a response frame.
- the frame body of the roaming confirmation message carries converted information between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1 to adapt the communication between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2.
- the information between the converted non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1 includes one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set, emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information, buffer status report BSR information, sequence number SN, data packet number PN, block acknowledgment BA session information, multi-access point AP mode, power information, target wake-up time TWT information, limited target wake-up time service phase R-TWT SP information, service identifier to link TID-to-Link mapping, extended capability information, extremely high throughput EHT capability information, enhanced multi-link EML capability information, MLD capability and operation information, and new link ID.
- the channel information is used to indicate channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD;
- the resource scheduling information is used to indicate resource unit RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1;
- the power information is used to indicate transmit power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1;
- the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD;
- the EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD or to indicate the EDCA parameter set established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1;
- the EPCS information is used to indicate EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information, and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or to indicate the EDCA parameter set for the non-AP MLD to request to establish EPCS priority access permission and EPCS priority
- the communication method also includes the AP MLD 2 scheduling the non-AP MLD transmission in combination with the working status of the non-AP MLD.
- Example 9 Method for target AP MLD to confirm roaming:
- (target) AP MLD 2 can also confirm the switchover result. As shown in Figure 8B, (target) AP MLD 2 sends an initial control frame (a roaming confirmation frame) on the newly established link (e.g., link 2') with the non-AP MLD to test the connectivity of the newly established link. If the non-AP MLD receives the roaming confirmation frame sent by (target) AP MLD 2, it responds with a roaming acknowledgment frame (Ack frame) on the link where the frame was received, indicating that the established link is normal and roaming is complete.
- a roaming confirmation frame e.g., link 2'
- Option 1 After the non-AP MLD responds with a Roaming Ack frame to (target) AP MLD 2, it sends a Roaming Completion frame to (current) AP MLD 1 on Link 1.
- Option 2 After receiving the roaming response frame from the non-AP MLD, (target) AP MLD 2 sends a roaming completion frame to (current) AP MLD 1 via the backhaul link.
- the (current) AP MLD 1 can immediately disconnect (delete link) from the non-AP MLD that is switched to the (target) AP MLD 2, and delete the context information related to the non-AP MLD (see the design of the previous embodiment for specific information).
- (target) AP MLD 2 performs the confirmation operation after roaming is completed.
- (target) AP MLD 2 performs the confirmation operation after roaming is completed.
- (target) AP MLD 2 can also carry the updated content after the context migration to the non-AP MLD through a new roaming confirmation frame (see Example 10), which to a certain extent ensures that the (target) AP MLD 2 can quickly provide subsequent services to the non-AP MLD, further reducing data interruption/delay during the roaming process of the non-AP MLD.
- Example 10 Format design of roaming confirmation frame, roaming response frame and roaming completion frame:
- the roaming confirmation frame and roaming response frame exchanged between the non-AP MLD and the (target) AP MLD 2 can be any of the following combinations: the roaming confirmation frame is equal to the RTS frame; the roaming response frame is equal to the CTS frame.
- the roaming confirmation frame is equal to the probe request frame; the roaming response frame is equal to the probe response frame.
- the roaming confirmation frame is equal to the multilink probe request frame; the roaming response frame is equal to the multilink probe response frame.
- the roaming confirmation frame is equal to the BSRP trigger frame; the roaming response frame is equal to the TB PPDU with BSR.
- the roaming confirmation frame is equal to the MU-RTS trigger frame; the roaming response frame is equal to the CTS frame.
- the roaming confirmation frame is equal to the data frame; the roaming response frame is equal to the response frame.
- FIG9A illustrates the format of a roaming confirmation frame provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- a new roaming confirmation frame may be defined, sent by (target) AP MLD 2.
- the frame body carries all or part of the information after context conversion/update in some embodiments of the present application.
- the non-AP MLD may respond with an acknowledgment frame (Ack frame).
- FIG9B is a schematic diagram of the format of a roaming completion frame provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- a possible roaming completion frame format is shown in FIG9B , wherein the roaming MLD address field is used to indicate the MLD MAC address of the non-AP MLD that completed the roaming.
- the (current) AP MLD 1 disconnects from the non-AP indicated by the roaming MLD address according to the indication of the MLD MAC address.
- the MLD connection deletes the context information related to the non-AP MLD (for details, see the design of the previous embodiment).
- the frames used by the non-AP MLD to confirm roaming completion are designed to ensure the integrity of the confirmation operation. Furthermore, this operation can be performed using existing frames, reducing design and signaling complexity, or using newly designed frames, allowing (target) AP MLD 2 to prepare resources for the non-AP MLD's subsequent transmission, thereby reducing roaming latency.
- Post-roaming behavior refers to the operations (behaviors) that the non-AP MLD and (target) AP MLD 2 need to perform respectively after the non-AP MLD and (target) AP MLD 2 exchange roaming confirmation frames and roaming response frames as designed by this implementation.
- the effect that can be achieved by this embodiment is as follows:
- the behavior after roaming is completed is designed so that both (target) AP MLD 2 and non-AP MLD are ready for the next transmission, thereby reducing the roaming delay to a certain extent.
- FIG 10 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication device 500 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- the wireless communication device can be a relay communication device, an AP, or a STA.
- the wireless communication device 500 shown in Figure 10 includes a processor 510, which can call and execute a computer program from a memory to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
- an AP includes an AP STA or an AP MLD
- a STA includes an AP STA or a non-AP STA or an AP MLD or a non-AP MLD.
- the wireless communication device 500 may further include a memory 520.
- the processor 510 may The computer program is called and executed in the memory 520 to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
- the memory 520 can be a separate device independent of the processor 510 or integrated into the processor 510.
- the wireless communication device 500 may specifically be a relay communication device in an embodiment of the present application, and the wireless communication device 500 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the relay communication device in each method in the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
- the wireless communication device 500 may specifically be a mobile AP in an embodiment of the present application, and the wireless communication device 500 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the AP in each method in the embodiment of the present application, which will not be described in detail here for the sake of brevity.
- processor of the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities.
- each step of the above method embodiment may be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or software instructions.
- the computer-readable storage medium may be applied to the STA in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program causes the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the STA in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, these processes are not described in detail here.
- An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, including computer program instructions.
- the computer program product may be applied to the STA in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program instructions cause a computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the STA in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application.
- these instructions are not described in detail here.
- the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本申请实施例涉及移动通信技术领域,具体涉及一种基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法、上下文迁移方法、信息转换方法、及无线通信设备。Embodiments of the present application relate to the field of mobile communication technologies, and in particular to a communication method, a context migration method, an information conversion method, and a wireless communication device based on multi-link device roaming.
在电气和电子工程师协会(Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,IEEE)的无线保真7(Wireless Fidelity,Wi-Fi 7)的802.11be及以前的Wi-Fi标准中,站点(Station,STA,包括非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD)从一个接入点(Access Point,AP)多链路设备(Multi-Link Device,MLD)漫游到另一个AP MLD需要先断开与旧AP MLD的连接接触关联状态,然后再与新的AP MLD关联建立连接,在这个过程中,STA(或non-AP MLD)将遭遇较长时间的中断。这有可能对无线通信的效率和质量造成不利影响。In the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Wireless Fidelity 7 (Wi-Fi 7) and earlier Wi-Fi standards, a station (STA, including non-AP Multi-Link Devices (MLDs)) roaming from one access point (AP) Multi-Link Device (MLD) to another must first disconnect from the old AP MLD and then reassociate with the new one. During this process, the STA (or non-AP MLD) experiences a significant interruption, potentially impacting the efficiency and quality of wireless communications.
发明内容Summary of the Invention
本申请实施例提供一种基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法、上下文迁移方法、信息转换方法、及无线通信设备,以改善现有技术的问题和其他问题。Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, a context migration method, an information conversion method, and a wireless communication device based on multi-link device roaming to improve the problems of the prior art and other problems.
本申请实施例提供的一种基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法,执行于非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD,其中,所述通信方法包括:non-AP MLD与第一接入点多链路设备AP MLD 1建立多链路连接;所述non-AP MLD向所述AP MLD 1或第二接入点多链路设备AP MLD 2请求进行漫游;以及完成漫游之后,所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2建立多链路连接。An embodiment of the present application provides a communication method based on multi-link device roaming, which is executed on a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD, wherein the communication method includes: the non-AP MLD establishes a multi-link connection with a first access point multi-link device AP MLD 1; the non-AP MLD requests roaming from the AP MLD 1 or the second access point multi-link device AP MLD 2; and after roaming is completed, the non-AP MLD establishes a multi-link connection with the AP MLD 2.
通过上述技术方案,所述non-AP MLD向所述AP MLD 1或AP MLD 2请求进行漫游,以及完成漫游之后,所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2建立多链路连接,从而改善所述non-AP MLD漫游所述AP MLD 2时的体验,做到基本无中断的漫游。Through the above technical solution, the non-AP MLD requests roaming from the AP MLD 1 or AP MLD 2, and after roaming is completed, the non-AP MLD establishes a multi-link connection with the AP MLD 2, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming on the AP MLD 2 and achieving basically uninterrupted roaming.
本申请实施例提供的一种基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法,执行于接入点多链路设备AP MLD,其中,所述通信方法包括:第一接入点多链路设备AP MLD 1向非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD发送第一链路重配置帧,进行漫游的发起操作,其中,所述第一链路重配置帧用于请求所述non-AP MLD由所述AP MLD 1漫游到第二接入点多链路设备AP MLD 2;以及所述AP MLD 1接收所述non-AP MLD发送的第二链路重配置帧,以取得漫游的结果。An embodiment of the present application provides a communication method based on multi-link device roaming, which is executed on an access point multi-link device AP MLD, wherein the communication method includes: a first access point multi-link device AP MLD 1 sends a first link reconfiguration frame to a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD to initiate a roaming operation, wherein the first link reconfiguration frame is used to request the non-AP MLD to roam from the AP MLD 1 to the second access point multi-link device AP MLD 2; and the AP MLD 1 receives a second link reconfiguration frame sent by the non-AP MLD to obtain a roaming result.
通过上述技术方案,所述AP MLD 1向所述non-AP MLD发送第一链路重配置帧,进行漫游的发起操作,以及所述AP MLD 1接收所述non-AP MLD发送的第二链路重配置帧,以取得漫游的结果,从而改善所述non-AP MLD漫游所述AP MLD 2时的体验,做到基本无中断的漫游。Through the above technical solution, the AP MLD 1 sends a first link reconfiguration frame to the non-AP MLD to initiate roaming, and the AP MLD 1 receives a second link reconfiguration frame sent by the non-AP MLD to obtain the roaming result, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming with the AP MLD 2 and achieving basically uninterrupted roaming.
本申请实施例提供的一种基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法,执行于接入点多链路设备AP MLD,其中,所述通信方法包括:第二接入点多链路设备AP MLD 2向非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD发送第一链路重配置帧,进行漫游的发起操作,其中,所述第一链路重配置帧用于请求所述non-AP MLD由第一接入点多链路设备AP MLD 1漫游到所述AP MLD 2;以及所述AP MLD 2接收所述non-AP MLD发送的第二链路重配置帧,以取得漫游的结果。An embodiment of the present application provides a communication method based on multi-link device roaming, which is executed on an access point multi-link device AP MLD, wherein the communication method includes: the second access point multi-link device AP MLD 2 sends a first link reconfiguration frame to the non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD to initiate a roaming operation, wherein the first link reconfiguration frame is used to request the non-AP MLD to roam from the first access point multi-link device AP MLD 1 to the AP MLD 2; and the AP MLD 2 receives the second link reconfiguration frame sent by the non-AP MLD to obtain a roaming result.
通过上述技术方案,所述AP MLD 2向所述non-AP MLD发送第一链路重配置帧,进行漫游的发起操作,以及所述AP MLD 2接收所述non-AP MLD发送的第二链路重配置帧,以取得漫游的结果,从而改善所述non-AP MLD漫游所述AP MLD 2时的体验,做到基本无中断的漫游。Through the above technical solution, the AP MLD 2 sends a first link reconfiguration frame to the non-AP MLD to initiate roaming, and the AP MLD 2 receives a second link reconfiguration frame sent by the non-AP MLD to obtain the roaming result, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming on the AP MLD 2 and achieving basically uninterrupted roaming.
本申请实施例提供的一种基于多链路设备漫游的上下文迁移方法,执行于接入点多链路设备AP MLD,其中,所述上下文迁移方法包括:第一接入点多链路设备AP MLD 1与第二接入点多链路设备AP MLD 2建立回程链路;所述AP MLD 1通过所述回程链路与所述AP MLD 2交互上下文迁移信息。An embodiment of the present application provides a context migration method based on multi-link device roaming, which is executed on an access point multi-link device AP MLD, wherein the context migration method includes: a first access point multi-link device AP MLD 1 establishes a backhaul link with a second access point multi-link device AP MLD 2; the AP MLD 1 exchanges context migration information with the AP MLD 2 through the backhaul link.
通过上述技术方案,所述AP MLD 1通过所述回程链路与所述AP MLD 2交互上下文迁移信息, 从而改善所述non-AP MLD漫游所述AP MLD 2时的体验,做到基本无中断的漫游,还能让AP MLD 2提前为所述non-AP MLD预留资料和进行通信的配置,进一步降低了漫游的时延。Through the above technical solution, the AP MLD 1 exchanges context migration information with the AP MLD 2 via the backhaul link. This improves the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming to the AP MLD 2, achieving essentially uninterrupted roaming. It also allows the AP MLD 2 to reserve data and configure communications for the non-AP MLD in advance, further reducing roaming delay.
本申请实施例提供的一种基于多链路设备漫游的信息转换方法,执行于非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD,其中,所述信息转换方法包括:non-AP MLD在第一接入点多链路设备AP MLD 1与第二接入点多链路设备AP MLD 2之间漫游时,转换所述non-AP MLD和所述AP MLD 1之间的信息以适配所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间的通信。An embodiment of the present application provides an information conversion method based on multi-link device roaming, which is executed on a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD, wherein the information conversion method includes: when the non-AP MLD roams between a first access point multi-link device AP MLD 1 and a second access point multi-link device AP MLD 2, converting information between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1 to adapt to the communication between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2.
通过上述技术方案,所述AP MLD 1转换所述non-AP MLD和所述AP MLD 1之间的信息以适配所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间的通信,从而改善所述non-AP MLD漫游所述AP MLD 2时的体验,做到基本无中断的漫游,方便所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2尽快进行正常通信,缩短漫游的时延。Through the above technical solution, the AP MLD 1 converts the information between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1 to adapt to the communication between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming on the AP MLD 2, achieving basically uninterrupted roaming, facilitating the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2 to communicate normally as soon as possible, and shortening the roaming delay.
本申请实施例提供的一种基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法,执行于非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD,其中,所述通信方法包括:non-AP MLD由第一接入点多链路设备AP MLD 1漫游到第二接入点多链路设备AP MLD 2之后,由所述non-AP MLD确认漫游的结果。An embodiment of the present application provides a communication method based on multi-link device roaming, which is executed on a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD, wherein the communication method includes: after the non-AP MLD roams from a first access point multi-link device AP MLD 1 to a second access point multi-link device AP MLD 2, the non-AP MLD confirms the roaming result.
通过上述技术方案,由所述non-AP MLD确认漫游的结果,从而改善所述non-AP MLD漫游所述AP MLD 2时的体验,做到基本无中断的漫游,所述non-AP MLD进行漫游完成后的确认操作,能够确保所述non-AP MLD在漫游所述AP MLD 2之后新建立的链路正常工作。Through the above technical solution, the non-AP MLD confirms the roaming result, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming the AP MLD 2 and achieving basically uninterrupted roaming. The confirmation operation performed by the non-AP MLD after the roaming is completed can ensure that the newly established link of the non-AP MLD after roaming the AP MLD 2 works normally.
本申请实施例提供的一种基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法,执行于接入点多链路设备AP MLD,其中,所述通信方法包括:非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD由第一接入点多链路设备AP MLD 1漫游到第二接入点多链路设备AP MLD 2之后,由所述AP MLD 2确认漫游的结果。An embodiment of the present application provides a communication method based on multi-link device roaming, which is executed on an access point multi-link device AP MLD, wherein the communication method includes: after a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD roams from a first access point multi-link device AP MLD 1 to a second access point multi-link device AP MLD 2, the AP MLD 2 confirms the roaming result.
通过上述技术方案,由所述AP MLD 2确认漫游的结果,从而改善所述non-AP MLD漫游所述AP MLD 2时的体验,做到基本无中断的漫游,所述AP MLD 2进行漫游完成后的确认操作,能够确保所述non-AP MLD在漫游所述AP MLD 2之后新建立的链路正常工作。Through the above technical solution, the AP MLD 2 confirms the roaming result, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming on the AP MLD 2 and achieving basically uninterrupted roaming. The confirmation operation performed by the AP MLD 2 after the roaming is completed can ensure that the newly established link of the non-AP MLD after roaming on the AP MLD 2 works normally.
本申请实施例提供的一种无线通信设备,包括:处理器和存储器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,执行上述的中继通信方法。A wireless communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application includes: a processor and a memory, the memory being used to store a computer program, the processor being used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to execute the above-mentioned relay communication method.
本申请实施例提供的中继通信设备,包括处理器和存储器。该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序,执行上述的中继通信方法。The relay communication device provided in the embodiment of the present application includes a processor and a memory. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to perform the above-mentioned relay communication method.
本申请实施例提供的第一节点,包括处理器和存储器。该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序,执行上述的中继通信方法。The first node provided in an embodiment of the present application includes a processor and a memory. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to perform the above-mentioned relay communication method.
本申请实施例提供的芯片,用于实现上述的中继通信方法。The chip provided in the embodiment of the present application is used to implement the above-mentioned relay communication method.
具体地,该芯片包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有该芯片的设备执行上述的中继通信方法。Specifically, the chip includes: a processor for calling and running a computer program from a memory, so that a device equipped with the chip executes the above-mentioned relay communication method.
本申请实施例提供的计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序使得计算机执行上述的中继通信方法。The computer-readable storage medium provided in an embodiment of the present application is used to store a computer program, which enables a computer to execute the above-mentioned relay communication method.
本申请实施例提供的计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序指令,该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行上述的中继通信方法。The computer program product provided in an embodiment of the present application includes computer program instructions, which enable a computer to execute the above-mentioned relay communication method.
本申请实施例提供的计算机程序,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述的用于中继通信方法。The computer program provided in the embodiment of the present application, when executed on a computer, enables the computer to execute the above-mentioned method for relay communication.
通过上述技术方案,改善所述non-AP MLD漫游所述AP MLD 2时的体验,做到基本无中断的漫游。Through the above technical solution, the experience of the non-AP MLD roaming the AP MLD 2 is improved, and basically uninterrupted roaming is achieved.
此处所说明的附图用来提供对本申请的进一步理解,构成本申请的一部分,本申请的示意性实施例及其说明用于解释本申请,并不构成对本申请的不当限定。在附图中:The drawings described herein are used to provide a further understanding of the present application and constitute a part of the present application. The illustrative embodiments of the present application and their descriptions are used to explain the present application and do not constitute an improper limitation on the present application. In the drawings:
图1A为IEEE 802.11be标准中接入点多链路设备(AP MLD)和非接入点多链路设备(non-AP MLD)建立多链路的示意图;Figure 1A is a schematic diagram of establishing multi-links between an access point multi-link device (AP MLD) and a non-access point multi-link device (non-AP MLD) in the IEEE 802.11be standard;
图1B为non-AP MLD 1与AP MLD 1和AP MLD 2保持多链路的示意图;Figure 1B is a schematic diagram showing non-AP MLD 1 maintaining multiple links with AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2.
图1C为本申请实施例提供的non-AP MLD 1从AP MLD 1切换到AP MLD 2的示意图;FIG1C is a schematic diagram of non-AP MLD 1 switching from AP MLD 1 to AP MLD 2 according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2A为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法的流程示意图;FIG2A is a schematic flow chart of a communication method based on multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2B为本申请实施例提供的non-AP MLD发起漫游的几种方式示意图;FIG2B is a schematic diagram of several methods for non-AP MLD to initiate roaming according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2C为本申请实施例提供的重配置多链路元素的存在比特映像地图子字段格式的示意图; FIG2C is a schematic diagram of the format of the presence bit map subfield of a reconfigured multilink element according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2D为本申请实施例提供的重配置多链路元素的通用信息字段格式的示意图;FIG2D is a schematic diagram of a general information field format of a reconfigured multilink element provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图2E为本申请实施例提供的重配置多链路元素的每站点概述子元素格式的示意图;FIG2E is a schematic diagram of the format of a per-site summary sub-element of a reconfiguration multilink element according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2F为本申请实施例提供的重配置多链路元素的STA控制字段格式的示意图;FIG2F is a schematic diagram of the STA control field format of the reconfiguration multilink element provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图2G为本申请实施例提供的重配置多链路元素的STA控制字段格式的示意图;FIG2G is a schematic diagram of the STA control field format of the reconfiguration multilink element provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图2H为本申请实施例提供的STA信息字段格式的新链路ID信息字段的示意图;FIG2H is a schematic diagram of a new link ID information field in a STA information field format according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2I为本申请实施例提供的重配置状态双重子字段格式的示意图;FIG2I is a schematic diagram of a dual subfield format of a reconfiguration status according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2J为本申请实施例提供的存在比特映像地图子字段的格式的示意图;FIG2J is a schematic diagram of the format of the presence bitmap subfield provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图2K为本申请实施例提供的基本多链路元素的通用信息字段的格式的示意图;FIG2K is a schematic diagram of the format of the general information field of the basic multilink element provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图2L为本申请实施例提供的每站点概述子元素的格式的示意图;FIG2L is a schematic diagram of the format of a per-site summary sub-element provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图2M为本申请实施例提供的基本多链路元素的STA控制字段的格式的示意图;FIG2M is a schematic diagram of the format of the STA Control field of the Basic Multilink Element provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图2N为本申请实施例提供的基本多链路元素的STA控制字段的格式的示意图;FIG2N is a schematic diagram of the format of the STA Control field of the Basic Multilink Element provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图3A为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法的流程示意图;FIG3A is a flow chart of a communication method based on multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application;
图3B为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法的流程示意图;FIG3B is a flow chart of a communication method based on multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4A为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法的流程示意图;FIG4A is a flow chart of a communication method based on multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4B为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法的流程示意图;FIG4B is a flow chart of a communication method based on multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5A为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的上下文迁移方法的通信方法的流程示意图;FIG5A is a flow chart of a communication method based on a context migration method for multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5B为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的上下文迁移方法的通信方法的流程示意图;FIG5B is a flow chart of a communication method based on a context migration method for multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5C为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的上下文迁移方法的通信方法的流程示意图;FIG5C is a flow chart of a communication method based on a context migration method for multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5D为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的上下文迁移方法的通信方法的流程示意图;FIG5D is a flow chart of a communication method based on a context migration method for multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的信息转换方法的流程示意图;FIG6 is a flow chart of an information conversion method based on multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application;
图7A为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法的流程示意图;FIG7A is a flow chart of a communication method based on multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application;
图7B为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法的流程示意图;FIG7B is a flow chart of a communication method based on multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application;
图8A为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法的流程示意图;FIG8A is a flow chart of a communication method based on multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application;
图8B为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法的流程示意图;FIG8B is a flow chart of a communication method based on multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application;
图9A为本申请实施例提供的漫游确认帧的格式的示意图;FIG9A is a schematic diagram of the format of a roaming confirmation frame provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图9B为本申请实施例提供的漫游完成帧的格式的示意图;FIG9B is a schematic diagram of the format of a roaming completion frame provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图10是本申请实施例提供的一种无线通信设备示意性结构图;FIG10 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图11是本申请实施例的芯片的示意性结构图;FIG11 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application;
图12是本申请实施例提供的一种无线通信系统的示意性框图。FIG12 is a schematic block diagram of a wireless communication system provided in an embodiment of the present application.
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述,显然,所描述的实施例是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本申请保护的范围。The following will describe the technical solutions in the embodiments of this application in conjunction with the drawings in the embodiments of this application. Obviously, the described embodiments are part of the embodiments of this application, not all of the embodiments. Based on the embodiments in this application, all other embodiments obtained by ordinary technicians in this field without making creative efforts are within the scope of protection of this application.
应理解,本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。It should be understood that the term "and/or" in this document simply describes a relationship between related objects, indicating that three possible relationships exist. For example, "A and/or B" can represent: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, or B exists alone. Furthermore, the character "/" in this document generally indicates that the related objects are in an "or" relationship.
为方便理解,表1给出了本申请中涉及到的主要缩写词的释义。For ease of understanding, Table 1 provides the definitions of the main abbreviations involved in this application.
表1:缩写释义
Table 1: Abbreviations
在基于IEEE 802.11be的Wi-Fi 7标准中,AP可以是具有多个附属AP的(EHT)AP MLD,如图1所示,AP MLD 1具有3个附属AP,分别为AP 1,AP 2,AP 3,STA可以是具有多个附属non-AP STA的non-AP MLD,如图1所示,non-AP MLD 1具有3个附属non-AP STA,分别为non-AP STA 1,non-AP STA 2,non-AP STA 3。non-AP MLD 1可以通过附属的多个non-AP STA分别与(EHT)AP MLD 1的多个附属AP建立多条链路,如图1所示的链路1、链路2、链路3(Link 1,Link 2,Link 3)。但是non-AP MLD 1如果想切换到另一个AP MLD,则需要断开与当前(EHT)AP MLD 1的所有link,解除认证和/或关联状态,再与新AP MLD重新进行认证和/或关联操作并重新建立多链路。In the Wi-Fi 7 standard based on IEEE 802.11be, an AP can be an (EHT)AP MLD with multiple subordinate APs. As shown in Figure 1, AP MLD 1 has three subordinate APs: AP 1, AP 2, and AP 3. A STA can be a non-AP MLD with multiple subordinate non-AP STAs. As shown in Figure 1, non-AP MLD 1 has three subordinate non-AP STAs: non-AP STA 1, non-AP STA 2, and non-AP STA 3. Non-AP MLD 1 can establish multiple links with multiple subordinate APs of (EHT)AP MLD 1 through its multiple subordinate non-AP STAs, such as Link 1, Link 2, and Link 3 (see Figure 1). However, if non-AP MLD 1 wants to switch to another AP MLD, it needs to disconnect all links with the current (EHT) AP MLD 1, cancel the authentication and/or association status, and then re-authenticate and/or associate with the new AP MLD and re-establish multiple links.
在Wi-Fi 8的标准化过程中,提出了non-AP MLD在切换AP MLD时可以与新AP MLD仍然保持状态4状态,即non-AP MLD不需要与新的AP MLD重新认证和/或关联。如图1B所示,non-AP MLD 1在移动场景下从(EHT)AP MLD 1切换到(EHT)AP MLD 2的过程中,可以在保持与(EHT)AP MLD 1的Link 1的连接的同时与(EHT)AP MLD 2建立Link 2和Link 3,等non-AP MLD 1完成切换后再断开与(EHT)AP MLD 1的Link 1,那么对于non-AP MLD 1来说整个切换过程中不存在中断,也就是本申请实施例要详细设计的无缝漫游机制。During the Wi-Fi 8 standardization process, it was proposed that a non-AP MLD can maintain State 4 with the new AP MLD when switching to an AP MLD. This means that the non-AP MLD does not need to re-authenticate and/or associate with the new AP MLD. As shown in Figure 1B, during a handover from (EHT)AP MLD 1 to (EHT)AP MLD 2 in a mobile scenario, non-AP MLD 1 can establish Link 2 and Link 3 with (EHT)AP MLD 2 while maintaining its connection to Link 1 with (EHT)AP MLD 1. After the handover is complete, non-AP MLD 1 disconnects Link 1 with (EHT)AP MLD 1. Therefore, for non-AP MLD 1, there is no interruption during the entire handover process. This is the seamless roaming mechanism designed in detail in the embodiments of this application.
本申请实施例提出non-AP MLD在AP MLD之间进行无中断切换的完整过程以及支撑无中断切换所需要进行的信令交互和帧结构设计等。The embodiments of the present application propose the complete process of non-AP MLD performing hitless switching between AP MLDs, as well as the signaling interaction and frame structure design required to support hitless switching.
如图1C所示,在non-AP MLD 1移动前,与(EHT)AP MLD 1建立了Link 1,Link 2和Link 3进行通信,当non-AP MLD 1发生移动后(或者通信环境状态发生改变后)non-AP MLD 1需要切换到附近的(EHT)AP MLD 2。在这个过程中,non-AP MLD 1或者(EHT)AP MLD 1或者目标(EHT)AP MLD 2都可能发起漫游操作,发起漫游时(EHT)AP MLD 1与目标(EHT)AP MLD 2需要进行上下文迁移以及可能需要进行信息的转换操作。Non-AP MLD 1在执行漫游时可以在保持与(EHT)AP MLD 1链路(如图Link 1)的情况下,与目标(EHT)AP MLD 2建立新的链路(如图Link 2和Link 3)。在完成漫游后,non-AP MLD 1或(EHT)AP MLD 2可以宣告漫游结束,然后non-AP MLD 1和/或(EHT)AP MLD 2执行后续的操作。如果上述过程发生故障,还需要进行故障恢复操作。As shown in Figure 1C, before non-AP MLD 1 moves, it establishes Link 1, Link 2, and Link 3 with (EHT) AP MLD 1 for communication. After non-AP MLD 1 moves (or the communication environment changes), non-AP MLD 1 needs to switch to the nearby (EHT) AP MLD 2. During this process, non-AP MLD 1, (EHT) AP MLD 1, or the target (EHT) AP MLD 2 may initiate roaming. When roaming is initiated, (EHT) AP MLD 1 and the target (EHT) AP MLD 2 may need to perform context migration and information conversion. When roaming, non-AP MLD 1 can establish new links (Link 2 and Link 3) with the target (EHT) AP MLD 2) while maintaining its link with (EHT) AP MLD 1 (Link 1 in the figure). After roaming is complete, non-AP MLD 1 or (EHT)AP MLD 2 can declare the roaming complete. Non-AP MLD 1 and/or (EHT)AP MLD 2 then perform subsequent operations. If a failure occurs during the preceding process, recovery is required.
如图1C所示,non-AP MLD 1进行漫游/切换AP MLD的原因通常是在移动过程中远离了(当前)AP MLD 1,导致其与AP MLD 1之间的链路质量下降(例如链路质量RSSI,信噪比SNR或信干噪比SINR等低于某个阈值),于此同时靠近了(目标)AP MLD 2,使得其与AP MLD 2之间的链路质量足以支撑正常的通信(例如链路质量RSSI,信噪比SNR或信干噪比SINR等超过某个阈值)。或者由于信道状态/通信环境的变化导致non-AP MLD 1与AP MLD 1之间的链路质量下降(例如链路质量RSSI,信噪比SNR或信干噪比SINR等低于某个阈值或中断),于此同时其与AP MLD 2之间的链路质量变好足以支撑正常的通信(例如链路质量RSSI,信噪比SNR或信干噪比SINR等超过某个阈值)。As shown in Figure 1C, non-AP MLD 1 roams or switches to AP MLD 1 because it moves away from (current) AP MLD 1, causing the link quality between it and AP MLD 1 to degrade (for example, the link quality RSSI, signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), or signal-to-interference-plus-noise ratio (SINR) falls below a certain threshold). Meanwhile, it moves closer to (target) AP MLD 2, making the link quality between it and AP MLD 2 sufficient to support normal communication (for example, the link quality RSSI, signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), or signal-to-interference-plus-noise ratio (SINR) exceeds a certain threshold). Alternatively, changes in the channel state or communication environment may cause the link quality between non-AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 1 to degrade (for example, the link quality RSSI, signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), or signal-to-interference-plus-noise ratio (SINR) falls below a certain threshold or is interrupted). Meanwhile, the link quality between non-AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2 improves to support normal communication (for example, the link quality RSSI, signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), or signal-to-interference-plus-noise ratio (SINR) exceeds a certain threshold).
本申请实施例提出如下技术方案:The embodiments of this application propose the following technical solutions:
1)发起漫游的方法设计。 1) Design of the method to initiate roaming.
a)Non-AP MLD发起漫游的方法。a) Non-AP MLD initiates roaming.
b)当前AP MLD发起漫游的方法。b) The method used by the current AP MLD to initiate roaming.
c)目标AP MLD发起漫游的方法。c) Method for target AP MLD to initiate roaming.
d)发起漫游的信令和帧格式设计。d) Design of signaling and frame format for initiating roaming.
2)当前AP MLD和目标AP MLD之间的上下文迁移设计。2) Design of context migration between current AP MLD and target AP MLD.
a)上下文迁移的信令和帧格式设计。a) Signaling and frame format design for context migration.
b)上下文迁移所指示的信息在当前AP MLD和目标AP MLD之间进行转换的方法。b) A method for converting the information indicated by context migration between the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD.
3)漫游完成的判定方法及后续操作设计。3) Roaming completion determination method and subsequent operation design.
a)Non-AP MLD进行漫游完成的确认操作方法。a) Confirmation method for Non-AP MLD roaming completion.
b)目标AP MLD进行漫游完成的确认操作方法。b) Confirmation method for target AP MLD roaming completion.
c)漫游完成时所采用的信令和帧结构设计。c) The signaling and frame structure design used when roaming is completed.
d)漫游完成后续行为设计。d) Design subsequent behaviors after roaming is completed.
为便于理解本申请实施例的技术方案,以下对本申请实施例相关的技术方案进行说明。To facilitate understanding of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the technical solutions related to the embodiments of the present application are described below.
发起漫游的方法设计:Method design for initiating roaming:
Non-AP MLD发起漫游的方法:Non-AP MLD roaming method:
图2A为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法的流程示意图,如图2A所示,所述基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法,执行于非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD,其中,所述通信方法包括以下至少一个操作:操作201A:non-AP MLD与第一接入点多链路设备AP MLD 1建立多链路连接;操作202A:所述non-AP MLD向所述AP MLD 1或第二接入点多链路设备AP MLD 2请求进行漫游;以及操作203A:完成漫游之后,所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2建立多链路连接。Figure 2A is a flow chart of a communication method based on multi-link device roaming provided in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 2A, the communication method based on multi-link device roaming is executed on a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD, wherein the communication method includes at least one of the following operations: operation 201A: the non-AP MLD establishes a multi-link connection with the first access point multi-link device AP MLD 1; operation 202A: the non-AP MLD requests roaming from the AP MLD 1 or the second access point multi-link device AP MLD 2; and operation 203A: after roaming is completed, the non-AP MLD establishes a multi-link connection with the AP MLD 2.
通过上述技术方案,所述non-AP MLD向所述AP MLD 1或AP MLD 2请求进行漫游,以及完成漫游之后,所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2建立多链路连接,从而改善所述non-AP MLD漫游所述AP MLD 2时的体验,做到基本无中断的漫游。Through the above technical solution, the non-AP MLD requests roaming from the AP MLD 1 or AP MLD 2, and after roaming is completed, the non-AP MLD establishes a multi-link connection with the AP MLD 2, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming on the AP MLD 2 and achieving basically uninterrupted roaming.
如前所述,AP MLD1是当前与non-AP MLD建立连接的多链路设备,AP MLD2是non-AP MLD需要漫游到的多链路设备。本申请实施例包含了non AP MLD向AP MLD1和向AP MLD2请求漫游两种情况。As previously described, AP MLD1 is the multi-link device currently connected to the non-AP MLD, and AP MLD2 is the multi-link device to which the non-AP MLD wishes to roam. This embodiment of the application includes two scenarios: the non-AP MLD requests roaming from AP MLD1 and the non-AP MLD requests roaming from AP MLD2.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2建立多链路连接后,所述non-AP MLD断开与所述AP MLD 1建立的所述多链路连接。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2建立多链路连接后,所述non-AP MLD仍然保持与所述AP MLD 1的多链路连接。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述non-AP MLD向所述AP MLD 1请求进行漫游之前,所述non-AP MLD向所述AP MLD 2发送第一帧,并接收所述AP MLD 2发送的第二帧,所述non-AP MLD通过所述第二帧判断是否向所述AP MLD 1请求进行漫游。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一帧和所述第二帧包括以下组合之一:请求发送RTS帧和清除发送CTS帧、探测请求帧和探测响应帧、多链路探测请求帧和多链路探测响应帧、或快速基本服务集切换FT请求帧和FT响应帧。In some embodiments of the present application, after the non-AP MLD establishes a multi-link connection with AP MLD 2, the non-AP MLD disconnects the multi-link connection established with AP MLD 1. In some embodiments of the present application, after the non-AP MLD establishes a multi-link connection with AP MLD 2, the non-AP MLD still maintains the multi-link connection with AP MLD 1. In some embodiments of the present application, before the non-AP MLD requests roaming from AP MLD 1, the non-AP MLD sends a first frame to AP MLD 2 and receives a second frame sent by AP MLD 2. The non-AP MLD determines whether to request roaming from AP MLD 1 based on the second frame. In some embodiments of the present application, the first frame and the second frame include one of the following combinations: a request to send RTS frame and a clear to send CTS frame, a probe request frame and a probe response frame, a multilink probe request frame and a multilink probe response frame, or a fast basic service set handover FT request frame and a FT response frame.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述non-AP MLD向所述AP MLD 1请求进行漫游之前,所述non-AP MLD接收所述AP MLD 2发送的第二帧,所述non-AP MLD通过所述第二帧判断是否向所述AP MLD 1请求进行漫游。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二帧包括信标帧。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述non-AP MLD通过所述第二帧判断是否向所述AP MLD 1请求进行漫游包括:所述non-AP MLD通过所述第二帧确认所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间的链路状态信息;和/或所述non-AP MLD通过所述第二帧确认所述AP MLD 2的状态信息。In some embodiments of the present application, before the non-AP MLD requests roaming from AP MLD 1, the non-AP MLD receives a second frame sent by AP MLD 2, and the non-AP MLD determines whether to request roaming from AP MLD 1 based on the second frame. In some embodiments of the present application, the second frame comprises a beacon frame. In some embodiments of the present application, the non-AP MLD determining whether to request roaming from AP MLD 1 based on the second frame includes: the non-AP MLD confirming link status information between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 2 using the second frame; and/or the non-AP MLD confirming status information of AP MLD 2 using the second frame.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间的所述链路状态信息包括接收信号强度指示RSSI、信道状态信息CSI、信号与干扰加噪声的比值SINR、信噪比SNR、参考信号接收功率RSRP、和/或参考信号接收质量RSRQ。通过此信息,Non-AP MLD可以获知自身与AP MLD 2之间的链路状态是否满足建立连接的需求。例如,对于以上各指示/信息,可以在Non-AP MLD中设置分别设置参考阈值,或者设置关联上述信息的加权计算阈值。当接收到的指示/信息的值达到预先设置的阈值时,认为链路状态满足建立连接的需求。In some embodiments of the present application, the link status information between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2 includes received signal strength indication RSSI, channel state information CSI, signal-to-interference-plus-noise ratio SINR, signal-to-noise ratio SNR, reference signal received power RSRP, and/or reference signal received quality RSRQ. Through this information, the Non-AP MLD can determine whether the link status between itself and AP MLD 2 meets the requirements for establishing a connection. For example, for each of the above indications/information, a reference threshold can be set separately in the Non-AP MLD, or a weighted calculation threshold associated with the above information can be set. When the value of the received indication/information reaches a preset threshold, it is considered that the link status meets the requirements for establishing a connection.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述AP MLD 2的所述状态信息包括电量状态指示、漫游可用窗口、漫游不可用窗口、基础服务集BSS负载、信道负载、最大支持的站点STA/non-AP MLD的数量、和/或移动AP MLD信息。通过此信息,Non-AP MLD可以获知AP MLD2的当前状态是否满足建立连接的需求。例如,类似地,对于以上各指示/信息,可以在Non-AP MLD中设置分别设置参考阈值,或者设置关联上述信息的加权计算阈值。当接收到的指示/信息的值达到预先设置的阈值时,认为 AP MLD 2地状态满足建立连接的需求。In some embodiments of the present application, the status information of the AP MLD 2 includes a power status indication, a roaming available window, a roaming unavailable window, a basic service set BSS load, a channel load, a maximum number of supported sites STA/non-AP MLD, and/or mobile AP MLD information. Through this information, the Non-AP MLD can know whether the current status of the AP MLD2 meets the requirements for establishing a connection. For example, similarly, for each of the above indications/information, a reference threshold can be set separately in the Non-AP MLD, or a weighted calculation threshold associated with the above information can be set. When the value of the received indication/information reaches a preset threshold, it is considered that The AP MLD state 2 meets the requirements for establishing a connection.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述non-AP MLD向所述AP MLD 1请求进行漫游包括:所述non-AP MLD向所述AP MLD 1发送第一链路重配置帧,并接收所述AP MLD 1发送的第二链路重配置帧。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述non-AP MLD向所述AP MLD 2请求进行漫游包括:所述non-AP MLD向所述AP MLD 2发送第一链路重配置帧,并接收所述AP MLD 2发送的第二链路重配置帧。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一链路重配置帧包括重配置多链路元素,应当理解,第一链路重配置帧的具体实现形式不限于此,可以根据实际需要调整。In some embodiments of the present application, the non-AP MLD requesting roaming from the AP MLD 1 includes: the non-AP MLD sending a first link reconfiguration frame to the AP MLD 1, and receiving a second link reconfiguration frame sent by the AP MLD 1. In some embodiments of the present application, the non-AP MLD requesting roaming from the AP MLD 2 includes: the non-AP MLD sending a first link reconfiguration frame to the AP MLD 2, and receiving a second link reconfiguration frame sent by the AP MLD 2. In some embodiments of the present application, the first link reconfiguration frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element. It should be understood that the specific implementation of the first link reconfiguration frame is not limited thereto and can be adjusted according to actual needs.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述重配置多链路元素的存在比特映像地图子字段包括多链路设备MLD媒介接入控制MAC地址存在字段、增强多链路EML能力存在字段、MLD能力和操作存在字段、和/或漫游信息存在字段,其中:所述MLD MAC地址存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的通用信息字段是否存在MLD MAC地址字段;所述EML能力存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的通用信息字段是否存在EML能力字段;所述MLD能力和操作存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的通用信息字段是否存在MLD能力和操作字段;所述漫游信息存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的通用信息字段或链路信息字段是否存在漫游信息字段。In some embodiments of the present application, the existence bit map subfield of the reconfigured multi-link element includes a multi-link device MLD media access control MAC address existence field, an enhanced multi-link EML capability existence field, an MLD capability and operation existence field, and/or a roaming information existence field, wherein: the MLD MAC address existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an MLD MAC address field; the EML capability existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an EML capability field; the MLD capability and operation existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an MLD capability and operation field; the roaming information existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field or link information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has a roaming information field.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述重配置多链路元素的通用信息字段包括MLD MAC地址字段、EML能力字段、MLD能力和操作字段、和漫游信息字段,其中:所述MLD MAC地址字段用于指示所述AP MLD 2的MLD MAC地址;所述EML能力字段用于指示所述non-AP MLD的增强多链路信息;所述MLD能力和操作字段用于指示所述non-AP MLD的多链路能力信息和操作参数;所述漫游信息字段用于指示以下信息中的一个或多个:信道信息、资源调度信息、功率信息、最大发送/接收空间流数目、增强型分布式信道接入EDCA参数集、应急准备通信服务EPCS信息、缓存状态报告BSR信息、序号编号SN、数据包编号PN、块确认BA会话信息、多接入点AP模式、电量信息、目标唤醒时间TWT信息、限定目标唤醒时间服务阶段R-TWT SP信息、业务标识符到链路TID-to-Link的映射、扩展能力信息、和极高吞吐量EHT能力信息。In some embodiments of the present application, the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element includes an MLD MAC address field, an EML capability field, an MLD capability and operation field, and a roaming information field, wherein: the MLD MAC address field is used to indicate the MLD MAC address of the AP MLD 2; the EML capability field is used to indicate the enhanced multi-link information of the non-AP MLD; the MLD capability and operation field is used to indicate the multi-link capability information and operation parameters of the non-AP MLD; the roaming information field is used to indicate one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set, emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information, buffer status report BSR information, sequence number SN, data packet number PN, block acknowledgment BA session information, multi-access point AP mode, power information, target wake-up time TWT information, target wake-up time service phase R-TWT SP information, service identifier to link TID-to-Link mapping, extended capability information, and extremely high throughput EHT capability information.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述信道信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的信道信息和/或所述non-AP MLD建立的链路对应的信道信息;所述资源调度信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的资源单元RU信息;所述功率信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的发送功率信息;所述最大发送/接收空间流数目用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的最大发送/接收空间流数目;所述增强型分布式信道接入EDCA参数集用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的EDCA参数集或用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的EDCA参数集;所述应急准备通信服务EPCS信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的EPCS能力信息、EPCS订阅信息和EPCS开启状态信息,和/或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2建立EPCS优先接入许可以及EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集;所述缓存状态报告BSR信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的缓存状态信息;所述序号编号SN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间的帧的SN;所述数据包编号PN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间已经发送完成的PN,或即将要发送的PN,或未发送的PN;所述块确认BA会话信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的块确认会话信息;所述多接入点AP模式用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的多AP协作模式;所述电量信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的休眠策略信息和/或所支持的休眠机制;所述目标唤醒时间TWT信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TWT信息;所述限定目标唤醒时间服务阶段R-TWT SP信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的R-TWT SP信息;所述业务标识符到链路TID-to-Link的映射用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TID-to-Link的映射方案,或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2之间建立的链路的TID-to-Link的映射方案;所述扩展能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的扩展能力信息;所述极高吞吐量EHT能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的EHT能力信息。In some embodiments of the present application, the channel information is used to indicate the channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or the channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD; the resource scheduling information is used to indicate the resource unit RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the power information is used to indicate the transmission power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD; the enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD. The EDCA parameter set may be used to indicate the EDCA parameter set established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information may be used to indicate the EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or may be used to indicate the EDCA parameter set that the non-AP MLD requests to establish an EPCS priority access permission and EPCS priority access with the AP MLD 2; the buffer status report BSR information may be used to indicate the buffer status information of the non-AP MLD; the sequence number SN may be used to indicate the SN of the frame between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; The data packet number PN is used to indicate the PN that has been sent between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or the PN that is about to be sent, or the PN that has not been sent; the block acknowledgment BA session information is used to indicate the block acknowledgment session information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the multi-access point AP mode is used to indicate the multi-AP collaboration mode supported by the non-AP MLD; the power information is used to indicate the sleep policy information and/or the supported sleep mechanism of the non-AP MLD; the target wake-up time TWT information is used to indicate the TWT information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the limited target wake-up time The service phase R-TWT SP information is used to indicate the R-TWT SP information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the service identifier to link TID-to-Link mapping is used to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or used to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme of the link established between the non-AP MLD request and the AP MLD 2; the extended capability information is used to indicate the extended capability information of the non-AP MLD; the extremely high throughput EHT capability information is used to indicate the EHT capability information of the non-AP MLD.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述重配置多链路元素包括每站点概述子元素用于携带发起漫游的所述non-AP MLD的概述信息。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述每站点概述子元素包括STA控制字段,所述STA控制字段包括链路标识符ID字段、重配置操作类型字段、新链路ID存在字段、和/或漫游信息存在字段,其中:所述链路ID字段用于指示链路ID;所述新链路ID存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的STA信息字段是否存在新链路ID信息字段;所述漫游信息存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的链路信息字段是否存在漫游信息字段。In some embodiments of the present application, the reconfiguration multi-link element includes a per-site summary sub-element for carrying summary information of the non-AP MLD that initiated roaming. In some embodiments of the present application, the per-site summary sub-element includes a STA control field, and the STA control field includes a link identifier ID field, a reconfiguration operation type field, a new link ID exists field, and/or a roaming information exists field, wherein: the link ID field is used to indicate the link ID; the new link ID exists field is used to indicate whether a new link ID information field exists in the STA information field of the reconfiguration multi-link element; and the roaming information exists field is used to indicate whether a roaming information field exists in the link information field of the reconfiguration multi-link element.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述重配置操作类型字段指示的值为5时,所述重配置操作类型字段设置为切换链路的意义/操作。在本申请的一些实施例中,当所述重配置操作类型字段指示为切换 链路字段和/或所述STA控制字段的新链路ID存在字段指示为存在时,所述STA控制字段中的链路ID字段指示为所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1断开的链路ID,所述新链路ID信息字段指示为所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间建立连接的链路ID。在本申请的一些实施例中,当所述重配置操作类型字段指示为切换链路字段和/或所述STA控制字段的新链路ID存在字段指示为存在时,所述STA控制字段中的链路ID字段指示为所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间建立连接的链路ID,所述新链路ID信息字段指示为所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1断开的链路ID。In some embodiments of the present application, when the value indicated by the reconfiguration operation type field is 5, the reconfiguration operation type field is set to the meaning/operation of switching the link. In some embodiments of the present application, when the reconfiguration operation type field indicates switching When the Link field and/or the New Link ID Present field of the STA Control field indicates "Present", the Link ID field in the STA Control field indicates the ID of the link between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 1 being disconnected, and the New Link ID Information field indicates the ID of the link for establishing a connection between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 2. In some embodiments of the present application, when the Reconfiguration Operation Type field indicates "Switch Link" and/or the New Link ID Present field of the STA Control field indicates "Present", the Link ID field in the STA Control field indicates the ID of the link for establishing a connection between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 2, and the New Link ID Information field indicates the ID of the link between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 1 being disconnected.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述新链路ID信息字段包括链路ID字段,所述链路ID字段用于指示链路的标识符,其中,所述新链路ID信息字段还包括链路ID扩展字段,所述链路ID字段和所述链路ID扩展字段联合指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间建立的新链路ID。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二链路重配置帧包括重配置状态列表字段。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述重配置状态列表字段包括一个或多个重配置状态双重子字段,所述重配置状态双重子字段包括链路ID信息字段和状态字段。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述链路ID信息字段包括链路ID子字段,所述链路ID子字段指示AP的链路ID,在所述第一链路重配置帧中指示添加或删除所述AP的所述链路ID。In some embodiments of the present application, the new link ID information field includes a link ID field, which is used to indicate an identifier of a link, wherein the new link ID information field also includes a link ID extension field, and the link ID field and the link ID extension field jointly indicate the new link ID established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2. In some embodiments of the present application, the second link reconfiguration frame includes a reconfiguration status list field. In some embodiments of the present application, the reconfiguration status list field includes one or more reconfiguration status dual subfields, and the reconfiguration status dual subfield includes a link ID information field and a status field. In some embodiments of the present application, the link ID information field includes a link ID subfield, and the link ID subfield indicates the link ID of the AP, indicating the addition or deletion of the link ID of the AP in the first link reconfiguration frame.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述状态字段包括第一状态码、第二状态码、第三状态码、第四状态码、和/或第五状态码,其中,第一状态码用于指示漫游请求被拒绝,因为所述AP MLD 2的BSS负载大于第一设定值,第二状态码用于指示漫游请求被拒绝,因为建立链路的信道负载大于第二设定值,第三状态码用于指示漫游请求被拒绝,因为请求建立链路的时间与所述AP MLD 2允许建立链路的窗口不匹配,第四状态码用于指示将进入休眠状态,暂不接受漫游请求,第五状态码用于指示漫游请求被拒绝,因为所述AP MLD 2已达最大支持的STA/non-AP MLD的数量。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二链路重配置帧还包括基本多链路元素,所述基本多链路元素的存在比特映像地图字段包括漫游信息存在字段,其中,所述漫游信息存在字段用于指示所述基本多链路元素的通用信息字段或链路信息字段是否存在漫游信息字段。In some embodiments of the present application, the status field includes a first status code, a second status code, a third status code, a fourth status code, and/or a fifth status code, wherein the first status code indicates that the roaming request is rejected because the BSS load of the AP MLD 2 is greater than a first set value, the second status code indicates that the roaming request is rejected because the channel load for establishing a link is greater than a second set value, the third status code indicates that the roaming request is rejected because the time for requesting link establishment does not match the window allowed for link establishment by the AP MLD 2, the fourth status code indicates that the AP will enter a dormant state and temporarily not accept roaming requests, and the fifth status code indicates that the roaming request is rejected because the AP MLD 2 has reached the maximum number of supported STAs/non-AP MLDs. In some embodiments of the present application, the second link reconfiguration frame also includes a basic multilink element, the presence bitmap field of the basic multilink element includes a roaming information presence field, wherein the roaming information presence field indicates whether a roaming information field exists in the general information field or the link information field of the basic multilink element.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述基本多链路元素的所述通用信息字段包括MLD MAC地址字段,用于指示所述AP MLD 2的MLD MAC地址。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述基本多链路元素的所述通用信息字段还包括链路ID信息字段、BSS参数更改计数字段、媒介同步延迟信息字段、EML能力字段、MLD能力和操作字段、AP MLD ID字段、和/或扩展MLD能力和操作字段,所述链路ID信息字段、所述BSS参数更改计数字段、所述媒介同步延迟信息字段、所述EML能力字段、所述MLD能力和操作字段、所述AP MLD ID字段、和/或所述扩展MLD能力和操作字段指示的内容是指所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间的相关信息。In some embodiments of the present application, the general information field of the basic multi-link element includes an MLD MAC address field, which is used to indicate the MLD MAC address of the AP MLD 2. In some embodiments of the present application, the general information field of the basic multi-link element also includes a link ID information field, a BSS parameter change count field, a media synchronization delay information field, an EML capability field, an MLD capability and operation field, an AP MLD ID field, and/or an extended MLD capability and operation field, and the contents indicated by the link ID information field, the BSS parameter change count field, the media synchronization delay information field, the EML capability field, the MLD capability and operation field, the AP MLD ID field, and/or the extended MLD capability and operation field refer to related information between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述漫游信息字段用于指示以下信息中的一个或多个:信道信息、资源调度信息、功率信息、最大发送/接收空间流数目、EDCA参数集、EPCS信息、BSR信息、SN、PN、BA会话信息、多AP模式、电量信息、TWT信息、R-TWT SP信息、TID-to-Link的映射、扩展能力信息、和EHT能力信息,其中:所述信道信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的信道信息和/或所述non-AP MLD建立的链路对应的信道信息;所述资源调度信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的RU信息;所述功率信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的发送功率信息;所述最大发送/接收空间流数目用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的最大发送/接收空间流数目;所述EDCA参数集用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的EDCA参数集或用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的EDCA参数集;所述EPCS信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的EPCS能力信息、EPCS订阅信息和EPCS开启状态信息,和/或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2建立EPCS优先接入许可以及EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集;所述BSR信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的缓存状态信息;所述SN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间的帧的SN;所述PN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间已经发送完成的PN,或即将要发送的PN,或未发送的PN;所述BA会话信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的块确认会话信息;所述多AP模式用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的多AP协作模式;所述电量信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的休眠策略信息和/或所支持的休眠机制;所述TWT信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TWT信息;所述R-TWT SP信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的R-TWT SP信息;所述TID-to-Link的映射用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TID-to-Link的映射方案,或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2之间建立的链路的TID-to-Link的映射方案;所述扩展能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的扩展能力信息;所述EHT能力信息用于指示所 述non-AP MLD的EHT能力信息。In some embodiments of the present application, the roaming information field is used to indicate one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, a maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, an EDCA parameter set, EPCS information, BSR information, SN, PN, BA session information, multi-AP mode, power information, TWT information, R-TWT SP information, TID-to-Link mapping, extended capability information, and EHT capability information, wherein: the channel information is used to indicate channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD; the resource scheduling information is used to indicate RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the power information is used to indicate transmit power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD; the EDCA parameter set is used to indicate an EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD or to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD or the EDCA parameter set established by the non-AP MLD. 1; the EPCS information is used to indicate the EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or the EDCA parameter set for indicating that the non-AP MLD requests to establish an EPCS priority access permission and EPCS priority access with the AP MLD 2; the BSR information is used to indicate the cache status information of the non-AP MLD; the SN is used to indicate the SN of the frame between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the PN is used to indicate the PN that has been sent, the PN to be sent, or the PN not sent between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the BA session information is used to indicate the block confirmation session information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the multi-AP mode is used to indicate the multi-AP cooperation mode supported by the non-AP MLD; the power information is used to indicate the sleep policy information and/or the supported sleep mechanism of the non-AP MLD; the TWT information is used to indicate the sleep policy information and/or the supported sleep mechanism of the non-AP MLD 1; the R-TWT SP information is used to indicate the R-TWT SP information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the TID-to-Link mapping is used to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or is used to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme of the link established between the non-AP MLD request and the AP MLD 2; the extended capability information is used to indicate the extended capability information of the non-AP MLD; the EHT capability information is used to indicate the Describes the EHT capability information of non-AP MLD.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述基本多链路元素的链路信息字段包括每站点概述子元素,所述每站点概述子元素包括STA控制字段,所述STA控制字段包括漫游信息存在字段。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述漫游信息存在字段用于指示所述基本多链路元素的链路信息字段是否存在漫游信息字段。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述通信方法还包括所述non-AP MLD启动定时器,以确认所述non-AP MLD发送所述第一链路重配置帧和所述non-AP MLD接收所述第二链路重配置帧之间的时间间隔。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述non-AP MLD发送所述第一链路重配置帧后,启动所述定时器,如果所述non-AP MLD在所述定时器对应的时间内,接收所述第二链路重配置帧,则所述non-AP MLD通过所述第二链路重配置帧判断是否进行漫游。In some embodiments of the present application, the link information field of the basic multi-link element includes a per-site summary sub-element, the per-site summary sub-element includes a STA control field, and the STA control field includes a roaming information presence field. In some embodiments of the present application, the roaming information presence field is used to indicate whether a roaming information field exists in the link information field of the basic multi-link element. In some embodiments of the present application, the communication method further includes the non-AP MLD starting a timer to determine the time interval between the non-AP MLD sending the first link reconfiguration frame and the non-AP MLD receiving the second link reconfiguration frame. In some embodiments of the present application, after the non-AP MLD sends the first link reconfiguration frame, it starts the timer. If the non-AP MLD receives the second link reconfiguration frame within the time specified by the timer, the non-AP MLD determines whether to roam based on the second link reconfiguration frame.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述non-AP MLD发送所述第一链路重配置帧后,启动所述定时器,如果所述non-AP MLD在所述定时器对应的时间内,未接收所述第二链路重配置帧,则所述non-AP MLD判断漫游失败。In some embodiments of the present application, after the non-AP MLD sends the first link reconfiguration frame, the timer is started. If the non-AP MLD does not receive the second link reconfiguration frame within the time corresponding to the timer, the non-AP MLD determines that the roaming has failed.
具体而言,在本申请的一些实施例中,图2B为本申请实施例的non-AP MLD发起漫游的几种方式示意图。如图2B所示,初始状态下non-AP MLD与AP MLD 1(也称作当前AP MLD)建立了多链路,例如non-AP MLD 1的附属non-AP STA 1与AP MLD 1的附属AP 1之间建立了link 1,non-AP MLD 1的附属non-AP STA 2与AP MLD 1的附属AP 2之间建立了link 2,non-AP MLD 1的附属non-AP STA 3与AP MLD 1的附属AP 3之间建立了link 3。完成漫游之后,non-AP MLD与AP MLD 2(也称作目标AP MLD)建立多链路,例如non-AP MLD 1的附属non-AP STA 2与AP MLD 1的附属AP 2之间建立link 2’,non-AP MLD 1的附属non-AP STA 3与AP MLD 1的附属AP 3之间建立link 3’,此外non-AP MLD断开与AP MLD 1建立的多链路(即link1,link 2和link 3)。Specifically, in some embodiments of the present application, FIG2B illustrates several methods for a non-AP MLD to initiate roaming. As shown in FIG2B , in the initial state, the non-AP MLD establishes multiple links with AP MLD 1 (also referred to as the current AP MLD). For example, Link 1 is established between non-AP STA 1, which is affiliated with non-AP MLD 1, and AP 1, which is affiliated with AP MLD 1. Link 2 is established between non-AP STA 2, which is affiliated with non-AP MLD 1, and AP 2, which is affiliated with AP MLD 1. Link 3 is established between non-AP STA 3, which is affiliated with non-AP MLD 1, and AP 3, which is affiliated with AP MLD 1. After roaming is completed, the non-AP MLD establishes multiple links with AP MLD 2 (also called the target AP MLD). For example, link 2' is established between non-AP STA 2, which is subordinate to non-AP MLD 1, and AP 2, which is subordinate to AP MLD 1. Link 3' is established between non-AP STA 3, which is subordinate to non-AP MLD 1, and AP 3, which is subordinate to AP MLD 1. In addition, the non-AP MLD disconnects the multiple links (i.e., link 1, link 2, and link 3) established with AP MLD 1.
实施例1:(方式1)non-AP MLD向(当前)AP MLD 1请求进行漫游:Example 1: (Method 1) The non-AP MLD requests roaming from the (current) AP MLD 1:
由于non-AP MLD可能不清楚其周边的目标AP MLD 2是否合适作为漫游的目标,所以non-AP MLD在向(当前)AP MLD 1请求进行漫游之前,可能需要向目标AP MLD 2先发送一个请求帧(可选的,如图2B中的虚线“请求帧1”所示),然后通过目标AP MLD 2回复的响应帧(如图2B中的虚线“响应帧1”所示)来判断接下来是否可以向(当前)AP MLD 1发起漫游请求。Non-AP MLD向目标AP MLD 2发送请求帧并获得响应帧的操作有以下作用中的一种或多种:Because the non-AP MLD may not be aware of whether the target AP MLD 2 in its vicinity is suitable as a roaming target, the non-AP MLD may need to send a request frame to the target AP MLD 2 before requesting roaming from the (current) AP MLD 1 (optional, as shown by the dotted line "Request Frame 1" in Figure 2B). The non-AP MLD then uses the response frame (as shown by the dotted line "Response Frame 1" in Figure 2B) sent by the target AP MLD 2 to determine whether a roaming request can be initiated to the (current) AP MLD 1. The non-AP MLD's operation of sending a request frame to the target AP MLD 2 and receiving a response frame has one or more of the following effects:
作用1:确认non-AP MLD与目标AP MLD 2之间的链路质量是否足够用于通信。Function 1: Confirm whether the link quality between the non-AP MLD and the target AP MLD 2 is sufficient for communication.
Non-AP MLD向目标AP MLD 2发送请求帧1(Request frame 1)之后,目标AP MLD 2回复响应帧1,non-AP MLD通过接收到的响应帧1的质量,例如接收信号强度指示RSSI、信道状态信息CSI、信干噪比SINR、信噪比SNR等指标)来判断是否要漫游到目标AP MLD 2。此时请求帧1和响应帧1可以为以下组合之一:After the non-AP MLD sends a request frame 1 to the target AP MLD 2, the target AP MLD 2 replies with a response frame 1. The non-AP MLD determines whether to roam to the target AP MLD 2 based on the quality of the received response frame 1, such as the received signal strength indicator RSSI, channel state information CSI, signal-to-interference-plus-noise ratio SINR, signal-to-noise ratio SNR, and other indicators. The request frame 1 and response frame 1 can be one of the following combinations:
请求帧1是RTS帧,响应帧1是CTS帧。The request frame 1 is an RTS frame, and the response frame 1 is a CTS frame.
请求帧1是探测请求帧,响应帧1是探测响应帧。The request frame 1 is a probe request frame, and the response frame 1 is a probe response frame.
请求帧1是多链路探测请求帧,响应帧1是多链路探测响应帧。The request frame 1 is a multi-link detection request frame, and the response frame 1 is a multi-link detection response frame.
请求帧1是FT请求帧,响应帧1是FT响应帧。The request frame 1 is an FT request frame, and the response frame 1 is an FT response frame.
接收到的响应帧1的质量,例如是RSSI大于或等于第一阈值(dBm)。第一阈值可以是预定义阈值。接收到的响应帧1的质量,例如是CSI的相关指标大于或等于第二阈值。第二阈值可以是预定义阈值。接收到的响应帧1的质量,例如是SINR大于或等于第三阈值(dB)。第三阈值可以是预定义阈值。接收到的响应帧1的质量,例如是SNR大于或等于第四阈值(dB)。第四阈值可以是预定义阈值。在一些实施例中,判断阈值还可以对应以上参数中部分或全部的加权求和的结果,即对相关参数预配置影响权重,加权求和后与预设阈值进行比较。The quality of the received response frame 1, for example, RSSI is greater than or equal to the first threshold (dBm). The first threshold may be a predefined threshold. The quality of the received response frame 1, for example, the relevant index of CSI is greater than or equal to the second threshold. The second threshold may be a predefined threshold. The quality of the received response frame 1, for example, SINR is greater than or equal to the third threshold (dB). The third threshold may be a predefined threshold. The quality of the received response frame 1, for example, SNR is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold (dB). The fourth threshold may be a predefined threshold. In some embodiments, the judgment threshold may also correspond to the result of the weighted summation of some or all of the above parameters, that is, the influence weights are preconfigured for the relevant parameters, and the weighted sum is compared with the preset threshold.
此外,还可以在non-AP MLD未向目标AP MLD 2发送请求帧1的情况下,目标AP MLD 2主动向non-AP MLD发送响应帧1,non-AP MLD通过接收到的响应帧1的质量(例如RSSI、CSI、SINR、SNR等指标)来判断是否要漫游到目标AP MLD 2。此时响应帧1可以为信标帧。In addition, if the non-AP MLD does not send a request frame 1 to the target AP MLD 2, the target AP MLD 2 can proactively send a response frame 1 to the non-AP MLD. The non-AP MLD determines whether to roam to the target AP MLD 2 based on the quality of the received response frame 1 (such as RSSI, CSI, SINR, SNR, etc.). In this case, the response frame 1 can be a beacon frame.
接收到的响应帧1的质量,例如是RSSI大于或等于第一阈值(dBm)。第一阈值可以是预定义阈值。接收到的响应帧1的质量,例如是CSI的相关指标大于或等于第二阈值。第二阈值可以是预定义阈值。接收到的响应帧1的质量,例如是SINR大于或等于第三阈值(dB)。第三阈值可以是预定义阈值。接收到的响应帧1的质量,例如是SNR大于或等于第四阈值(dB)。第四阈值可以是预定义 阈值。在一些实施例中,判断阈值还可以对应以上参数中部分或全部的加权求和的结果,即对相关参数预配置影响权重,加权求和后与预设阈值进行比较。The quality of the received response frame 1, for example, RSSI is greater than or equal to the first threshold (dBm). The first threshold may be a predefined threshold. The quality of the received response frame 1, for example, CSI related indicators are greater than or equal to the second threshold. The second threshold may be a predefined threshold. The quality of the received response frame 1, for example, SINR is greater than or equal to the third threshold (dB). The third threshold may be a predefined threshold. The quality of the received response frame 1, for example, SNR is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold (dB). The fourth threshold may be a predefined Threshold. In some embodiments, the judgment threshold may also correspond to the result of a weighted sum of some or all of the above parameters, that is, pre-configured influence weights are applied to the relevant parameters, and the weighted sum is compared with the preset threshold.
作用2:确认目标AP MLD 2当前的状态是否接受non-AP MLD的漫游。Function 2: Confirm whether the current status of target AP MLD 2 accepts roaming from non-AP MLD.
Non-AP MLD向目标AP MLD 2发送请求帧1之后,目标AP MLD 2回复响应帧1,non-AP MLD通过接收到的响应帧1的指示来判断是否要漫游到目标AP MLD 2。具体的指示为目标AP MLD 2以下字段/信息中的一种或多种:After the non-AP MLD sends a request frame 1 to the target AP MLD 2, the target AP MLD 2 replies with a response frame 1. The non-AP MLD determines whether to roam to the target AP MLD 2 based on the indication in the received response frame 1. The specific indication is one or more of the following fields/information in the target AP MLD 2:
电量状态指示:用于指示当前电量状态是否仍可接受新的non-AP MLD进行漫游,例如电量状态指示(或电源管理指示)等于1,代表未进入休眠状态,可接受漫游请求;电量状态指示(或电源管理指示)等于0,代表将进入休眠状态,暂不接受漫游请求;反之亦然。Battery status indication: used to indicate whether the current battery status can still accept new non-AP MLD for roaming. For example, if the battery status indication (or power management indication) is equal to 1, it means that the device has not entered the sleep state and can accept roaming requests; if the battery status indication (or power management indication) is equal to 0, it means that the device will enter the sleep state and will not accept roaming requests for the time being; and vice versa.
漫游可用窗口(Availability Window):用于指示当前设备接受新的non-AP MLD进行漫游的窗口信息,可以包含窗口的起始时间,持续期间以及窗口的周期/间隔等信息。Non-AP MLD通过这个信息来决定其发起漫游请求的时间。Availability Window: This indicates the window in which the current device will accept new non-AP MLDs for roaming. This window includes the start time, duration, and period/interval of the window. The non-AP MLD uses this information to determine when to initiate a roaming request.
漫游不可用窗口:用于指示当前设备不接受新的non-AP MLD进行漫游的窗口信息,可以包含窗口的起始时间,持续期间以及窗口的周期/间隔等信息。Non-AP MLD通过这个信息来决定其发起漫游请求的时间,避开漫游不可用窗口所指示的时间,在漫游不可用窗口所指示的时间之外请求漫游。Roaming Unavailable Window: This window indicates that the current device will not accept new non-AP MLDs for roaming. This window includes the start time, duration, and period/interval of the window. Non-AP MLDs use this information to determine when to initiate roaming requests, avoiding the time indicated by the roaming unavailable window and requesting roaming outside of the window.
BSS负载:用于指示当前设备所在的BSS的负载情况,如果BSS负载指示负载过高,non-AP MLD可以基于此信息不请求漫游到该目标AP MLD 2;如果BSS负载指示负载较低,non-AP MLD可以基于此信息请求漫游到该目标AP MLD 2。BSS load: Used to indicate the load of the BSS where the current device is located. If the BSS load indicates that the load is too high, the non-AP MLD can not request roaming to the target AP MLD 2 based on this information; if the BSS load indicates that the load is low, the non-AP MLD can request roaming to the target AP MLD 2 based on this information.
信道负载:用于指示当前设备所工作/支持的各个信道的负载情况,如果信道负载指示某个/某些信道负载过高,non-AP MLD可以基于此信息不请求漫游到该目标AP MLD 2,或基于此信息请求通过负载不高的信道建立新的链路(link)。Channel load: Used to indicate the load status of each channel currently supported by the device. If the channel load indicates that the load of a certain channel is too high, the non-AP MLD can not request to roam to the target AP MLD 2 based on this information, or can request to establish a new link through a channel with less load based on this information.
支持的STA的最大总数:用于指示当前设备所支持的(或所能服务的)STA/non-AP MLD的总数,如果当前设备正在服务的STA/non-AP MLD数量等于支持的STA的最大总数所指示的数量,那么non-AP MLD则基于此信息不向该目标AP MLD 2进行漫游。Maximum total number of STAs supported: used to indicate the total number of STAs/non-AP MLDs supported (or capable of being served) by the current device. If the number of STAs/non-AP MLDs being served by the current device is equal to the number indicated by the maximum total number of STAs supported, then the non-AP MLD will not roam towards the target AP MLD 2 based on this information.
移动AP MLD信息:用于指示当前设备是否是一个移动AP MLD(以及作为移动AP MLD时所支持的能力/参数信息等)。如果是移动AP MLD,由于移动AP MLD能力有限,non-AP MLD可能为了找到一个通信更加可靠的目标AP MLD,因此不会向该设备发起漫游请求。如果不是移动AP MLD,non-AP MLD可能向该设备发起漫游请求。Mobility AP MLD information: Indicates whether the current device is a mobility AP MLD (and the capabilities and parameters supported by it as a mobility AP MLD). If it is a mobility AP MLD, due to its limited capabilities, the non-AP MLD may not initiate a roaming request to the device in order to find a target AP MLD with more reliable communication. If it is not a mobility AP MLD, the non-AP MLD may initiate a roaming request to the device.
通过以上信令的交互,non-AP MLD获得目标AP MLD 2的状态信息以及两者之间的链路状态信息,non-AP MLD基于以上信息决定是否向(当前)AP MLD 1请求进行漫游到目标AP MLD 2。如果non-AP MLD决定漫游到目标AP MLD 2,则会(在link 1上)向(当前)AP MLD 1发送链路重配置请求帧,进行漫游的发起操作,然后(当前)AP MLD 1(在link 1上)回复链路重配置响应帧,通知漫游的结果。在此过程中,(当前)AP MLD 1与(目标)AP MLD 2之间还要进行上下文迁移的操作,具体见以下本申请的一些实施例的设计。Through the above signaling exchanges, the non-AP MLD obtains the status information of the target AP MLD 2 and the link status information between them. Based on this information, the non-AP MLD decides whether to request (current) AP MLD 1 to roam to the target AP MLD 2. If the non-AP MLD decides to roam to the target AP MLD 2, it sends a Link Reconfiguration Request frame (on Link 1) to (current) AP MLD 1 to initiate roaming. Then, (current) AP MLD 1 responds with a Link Reconfiguration Response frame (on Link 1) to notify the roaming result. During this process, context migration is also performed between (current) AP MLD 1 and (target) AP MLD 2. For details, see the designs of some embodiments of this application below.
链路重配置请求帧格式设计:Link reconfiguration request frame format design:
链路重配置请求帧的行动字段格式如下表2所示:The action field format of the link reconfiguration request frame is shown in Table 2 below:
表2:链路重配置请求帧操作字段格式
Table 2: Link Reconfiguration Request Frame Operation Field Format
对话令牌(Dialog Token):字段由发送链路重配置请求帧的非接入点多链路设备设置为非零的值。Dialog Token: The Dialog Token field is set to a non-zero value by the non-access point multilink device that sends the Link Reconfiguration Request frame.
重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)包括存在比特映射地图子字段(Presence Bitmap subfield),通用信息字段(Common Info field)和每站点概述子元素(Per-STA Profile subelement)等,具体如下:The Reconfiguration Multi-Link element includes the Presence Bitmap subfield, the Common Info field, and the Per-STA Profile subelement, as follows:
图2C为本申请实施例提供的重配置多链路元素的存在比特映像地图子字段格式的示意图,图2D为本申请实施例提供的重配置多链路元素的通用信息字段格式的示意图。如图2C所示,MLD MAC地址存在(MLD MAC Address Present)等于1用于指示图2D所示的重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的通用信息字段(Common Info field)存在MLD MAC地址字段,MLD MAC地址存在(MLD MAC Address Present)等于0用于指示图2D所示的重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的通用信息字段(Common Info field)不存在MLD MAC地址字段。FIG2C is a schematic diagram of the format of the presence bitmap subfield of the reconfiguration multi-link element provided in an embodiment of the present application, and FIG2D is a schematic diagram of the format of the common information field of the reconfiguration multi-link element provided in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG2C , MLD MAC Address Present is equal to 1 and is used to indicate that the common information field of the reconfiguration multi-link element shown in FIG2D contains the MLD MAC Address field, and MLD MAC Address Present is equal to 0 and is used to indicate that the common information field of the reconfiguration multi-link element shown in FIG2D does not contain the MLD MAC Address field.
EML能力存在等于1,用于指示图2D所示的重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的通用信息字段(Common Info field)存在EML能力,EML能力存在等于0,用于指示图2D所示的重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的通用信息字段(Common Info field)不存在EML能力。The EML capability exists equal to 1, which is used to indicate that the common information field (Common Info field) of the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element) shown in Figure 2D has EML capability. The EML capability exists equal to 0, which is used to indicate that the common information field (Common Info field) of the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element) shown in Figure 2D does not have EML capability.
MLD能力和操作存在等于1,用于指示图2D所示的重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的通用信息字段(Common Info field)存在MLD能力和操作字段,MLD能力和操作存在等于0,用于指示图2D所示的重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的通用信息字段(Common Info field)不存在MLD能力和操作字段。The MLD capability and operation exists equal to 1, which is used to indicate that the MLD capability and operation field exists in the common information field (Common Info field) of the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element) shown in Figure 2D. The MLD capability and operation exists equal to 0, which is used to indicate that the MLD capability and operation field does not exist in the common information field (Common Info field) of the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element) shown in Figure 2D.
此外,本申请实施例提出将重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的存在比特映射地图子字段(Presence Bitmap subfield)的B3~B11中的任意一个比特(例如bit 3)定义为漫游信息存在字段。In addition, an embodiment of the present application proposes to define any bit (for example, bit 3) in B3 to B11 of the presence bitmap subfield of the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element) as a roaming information presence field.
漫游信息存在用于指示图2D所示的重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的通用信息字段(Common Info field)是否存在漫游信息字段,例如漫游信息存在等于0,代表图2D所示的重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的通用信息字段(Common Info field)不存在漫游信息字段;漫游信息存在等于1,代表图2D所示的重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的通用信息字段(Common Info field)存在漫游信息字段。The roaming information exists is used to indicate whether there is a roaming information field in the common information field (Common Info field) of the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element) shown in FIG2D . For example, if the roaming information exists is equal to 0, it means that there is no roaming information field in the common information field (Common Info field) of the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element) shown in FIG2D ; if the roaming information exists is equal to 1, it means that there is a roaming information field in the common information field (Common Info field) of the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element) shown in FIG2D .
重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的通用信息字段(Common Info field)格式修改: The format of the Common Info field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element has been modified:
值得注意的是,为了实现non-AP MLD向(当前)AP MLD 1请求进行漫游到(目标)AP MLD 2,本申请实施例提出当图2D中重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的通用信息字段(Common Info field)中存在漫游信息字段(即图2C中重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的存在比特映射地图子字段(Presence Bitmap subfield)中漫游信息存在等于1)时,重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的通用信息字段(Common Info field)中的MLD MAC地址应指示(目标)AP MLD 2的MLD MAC地址。重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的通用信息字段(Common Info field)中的EML能力字段所指示的内容是指non-AP MLD的增强多链路信息(具体内容与IEEE 802.11be标准保持一致),重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的通用信息字段(Common Info field)中的MLD能力和操作字段指示的内容是指non-AP MLD的多链路能力信息和操作参数(具体内容与IEEE 802.11be标准保持一致)。It is worth noting that in order to enable the non-AP MLD to request the (current) AP MLD 1 to roam to the (target) AP MLD 2, the embodiment of the present application proposes that when there is a roaming information field in the Common Info field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element in Figure 2D (that is, the roaming information presence in the Presence Bitmap subfield of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element in Figure 2C is equal to 1), the MLD MAC address in the Common Info field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element should indicate the MLD MAC address of the (target) AP MLD 2. The content indicated by the EML capability field in the Common Info field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element refers to the enhanced multi-link information of non-AP MLD (the specific content is consistent with the IEEE 802.11be standard), and the content indicated by the MLD capability and operation fields in the Common Info field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element refers to the multi-link capability information and operation parameters of non-AP MLD (the specific content is consistent with the IEEE 802.11be standard).
重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的通用信息字段(Common Info field)中的漫游信息字段是本申请实施例新增的字段,用于指示以下信息中的一种或多种:The roaming information field in the Common Info field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element is a new field added in the embodiment of the present application and is used to indicate one or more of the following information:
信道和带宽:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD所支持的信道信息(包括信道带宽,信道编号等)和/或发起漫游的non-AP MLD想要建立的新链路对应的信道信息(包括信道带宽,信道编号等)。Channel and bandwidth: Used to indicate the channel information (including channel bandwidth, channel number, etc.) supported by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and/or the channel information (including channel bandwidth, channel number, etc.) corresponding to the new link that the non-AP MLD initiating roaming wants to establish.
RU分配:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的RU(index)信息。RU allocation: Used to indicate the RU (index) information used by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming to communicate with the (current) AP MLD 1.
功率限制(Power Limit):用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的发送功率信息(例如最大发送功率,最小发送功率等)。Power Limit: Used to indicate the transmit power information (such as maximum transmit power, minimum transmit power, etc.) used by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming to communicate with the (current) AP MLD 1.
Max TX/RX Nss:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD支持的最大发送/接收空间流(Spatial Stream)数目。Max TX/RX Nss: Used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams (Spatial Stream) supported by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming.
EDCA参数集:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD所支持的EDCA参数集,或用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1所建立的EDCA参数集(non-AP MLD在链路重配置请求帧中携带该EDCA参数集的目的是让non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2基于该EDCA参数集建立类似的/新的EDCA参数集)。EDCA parameter set: used to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming, or used to indicate the EDCA parameter set established between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and (current) AP MLD 1 (the purpose of the non-AP MLD carrying the EDCA parameter set in the link reconfiguration request frame is to allow the non-AP MLD and (target) AP MLD 2 to establish a similar/new EDCA parameter set based on the EDCA parameter set).
EPCS信息:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD支持的EPCS能力信息,EPCS订阅信息和EPCS开启状态信息,还可用于non-AP MLD请求与(目标)AP MLD 2建立EPCS优先接入许可以及EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集。EPCS information: used to indicate the EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming. It can also be used by the non-AP MLD to request to establish EPCS priority access permission and EDCA parameter set for EPCS priority access with (target) AP MLD 2.
BSR相关信息:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD的缓存状态信息(具体合适和内容见IEEE 802.11标准中的BSR控制子域和/或QoS控制字段,包含缓存大小,缓存业务类型等信息)。BSR related information: used to indicate the cache status information of the non-AP MLD that initiated roaming (for specific details and content, see the BSR control subdomain and/or QoS control field in the IEEE 802.11 standard, including cache size, cache service type and other information).
SN:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1之间的帧的序号编号(Sequence Number)。SN: Used to indicate the sequence number of the frame between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and the (current) AP MLD 1.
PN:PN用来对媒介接入控制MAC层服务数据单元MSDU、A-MSDU和MMPDU等中的MPDU进行编号。用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1之间已经发送完成的数据包编号(Packet Number),或即将要发送的数据包编号(Packet Number),或未发送的剩余数据包编号(Packet Number)。PN: PN is used to number the MPDUs in the Media Access Control (MAC) layer Service Data Units (MSDUs), A-MSDUs, and MMPDUs. It indicates the number of packets that have been sent, the number of packets that are about to be sent, or the number of remaining packets that have not been sent between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and the (current) AP MLD 1.
BA相关信息:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1所建立的BlockAck会话信息,例如包括BA协议、BA记分板等,详见IEEE 802.11标准。BA-related information: used to indicate the BlockAck session information established between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and the (current) AP MLD 1, such as the BA protocol, BA scoreboard, etc. For details, see the IEEE 802.11 standard.
多AP模式:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD所支持的多AP协作模式,例如C-TDMA,C-OFDMA,C-SR,C-BF,J-TX等。Multi-AP mode: used to indicate the multi-AP collaboration mode supported by the non-AP MLD that initiates roaming, such as C-TDMA, C-OFDMA, C-SR, C-BF, J-TX, etc.
电量相关信息:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD的休眠策略信息,例如休眠的窗口信息(开始休眠时间,休眠时长,休眠的窗口间隔时长等)和/或所支持的休眠机制等。Power-related information: used to indicate the sleep policy information of the non-AP MLD that initiates roaming, such as the sleep window information (sleep start time, sleep duration, sleep window interval, etc.) and/or the supported sleep mechanisms.
TWT元素:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1之间建立的TWT信息。TWT element: Used to indicate the TWT information established between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and the (current) AP MLD 1.
R-TWT SP:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1之间建立的R-TWT SP信息。 R-TWT SP: used to indicate the R-TWT SP information established between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and the (current) AP MLD 1.
TID-to-Link映射:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1之间建立TID-to-Link映射方案,辅助non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2之间建立新链路时作为TID-to-Link映射的参考;或用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD请求与(目标)AP MLD 2之间建立的新链路的TID-to-Link映射方案。TID-to-Link mapping: used to indicate the establishment of a TID-to-Link mapping scheme between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and the (current) AP MLD 1, serving as a reference for TID-to-Link mapping when assisting the non-AP MLD in establishing a new link with the (target) AP MLD 2; or used to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme for establishing a new link between the non-AP MLD requesting the roaming initiation and the (target) AP MLD 2.
扩展能力元素:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD的扩展能力信息,具体内容见IEEE 802.11的基准标准规范。Extended capability element: used to indicate the extended capability information of the non-AP MLD initiating roaming. For details, see the IEEE 802.11 baseline standard specification.
EHT能力元素:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD的极高吞吐量能力信息,具体内容见IEEE 802.11be标准规范。EHT capability element: used to indicate the extremely high throughput capability information of the non-AP MLD initiating roaming. For details, see the IEEE 802.11be standard specification.
重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的每站点概述子元素(Per-STA Profile subelement)格式修改:The format of the Per-STA Profile subelement of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element has been modified:
图2E为本申请实施例提供的重配置多链路元素的每站点概述子元素格式的示意图。重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的每站点概述子元素(Per-STA Profile subelement)格式如图2E所示,该每站点概述子元素(Per-STA Profile subelement)用于携带发起漫游的non-AP MLD的每站点概述。FIG2E is a schematic diagram illustrating the format of a per-STA profile subelement of a reconfiguration multi-link element according to an embodiment of the present application. FIG2E illustrates the format of a per-STA profile subelement of a reconfiguration multi-link element. The per-STA profile subelement carries a per-STA profile of a non-AP MLD that initiates roaming.
图2F为本申请实施例提供的重配置多链路元素的STA控制字段格式的示意图。STA控制字段格式如图2F所示,本申请实施例提出在重配置操作类型中新增一种重配置操作类型,见表3,将重配置操作类型的次序等于5定义为切换链路的方式。Figure 2F is a schematic diagram of the STA Control field format of the Reconfiguration Multilink Element provided in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 2F, this embodiment of the present application proposes adding a new reconfiguration operation type to the reconfiguration operation types, as shown in Table 3. A reconfiguration operation type order of 5 is defined as a link switching method.
表3:重配置操作类型子字段编码
Table 3: Reconfiguration Operation Type Subfield Coding
此外,图2G为本申请实施例提供的重配置多链路元素的STA控制字段格式的示意图。本申请实施例提出将STA控制字段的Bit 14和Bit 15中的任意一个bit(例如Bit 14)定义为新链路ID存在字段,当新链路ID存在等于1,代表重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的STA信息字段中存在新链路ID信息字段(见图2G);当新链路ID存在等于0,代表重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的STA信息字段中不存在新链路ID信息字段。本申请实施例提出将STA控制字段的比特14(Bit 14)和比特15(Bit 15)中的任意一个比特(例如比特15)定义为漫游信息存在字段,当漫游信息存在等于1,代表重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element) 的STA信息字段中存在漫游信息字段(见图2G);当漫游信息存在等于0,代表重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的STA信息字段中不存在漫游信息字段。In addition, Figure 2G is a schematic diagram of the STA control field format of the reconfiguration multi-link element provided in an embodiment of the present application. The embodiment of the present application proposes to define any one bit (for example, Bit 14) of Bit 14 and Bit 15 of the STA control field as a new link ID existence field. When the new link ID existence is equal to 1, it represents that the new link ID information field exists in the STA information field of the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element) (see Figure 2G); when the new link ID existence is equal to 0, it represents that the new link ID information field does not exist in the STA information field of the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element). The embodiment of the present application proposes to define any one bit (for example, Bit 15) of Bit 14 and Bit 15 (Bit 15) of the STA control field as a roaming information existence field. When the roaming information existence is equal to 1, it represents the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element) There is a roaming information field in the STA information field of the reconfiguration multi-link element (see Figure 2G); when the roaming information field is equal to 0, it means that there is no roaming information field in the STA information field of the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element).
当重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的STA控制字段中的重配置操作类型(Reconfiguration Operation Type)设置为(次序)5(即本申请实施例定义的切换链路的方式),那么STA控制字段的新链路ID存在需要设置为1,也就意味着重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的STA信息字段(见图2G)中存在新链路ID信息(具体格式如图2H)。此时重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的STA控制字段中的链路ID字段指示的是需要与(当前)AP MLD 1断开链路的链路ID,重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的STA信息字段的新链路ID信息字段(具体格式如图2H)指示的是需要与(目标)AP MLD 2之间建立链路的链路ID。且先执行新链路(对应于STA信息字段的新链路ID信息字段中的链路ID)的建立,再执行旧链路(对应于STA控制字段的链路ID字段)的断开。When the Reconfiguration Operation Type in the STA Control field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element is set to (order) 5 (i.e., the link switching method defined in the embodiment of the present application), the New Link ID in the STA Control field needs to be set to 1, which means that the New Link ID information (specific format is shown in Figure 2H) is present in the STA Information field (see Figure 2G) of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element. At this time, the Link ID field in the STA Control field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element indicates the link ID that needs to be disconnected from the (current) AP MLD 1, and the New Link ID information field (specific format is shown in Figure 2H) in the STA Information field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element indicates the link ID that needs to be established with the (target) AP MLD 2. The new link (corresponding to the link ID in the new link ID information field of the STA information field) is established first, and then the old link (corresponding to the link ID field of the STA control field) is disconnected.
图2H为本申请实施例提供的STA信息字段格式的新链路ID信息字段的示意图,新链路ID信息字段具体格式如图2H所示,包含4比特的链路ID字段和4比特的链路ID扩展字段,其中链路ID字段可以用于指示常规的链路的标识符(即链路ID等于0~14),当常规的链路的标识符不够使用时,链路ID字段和链路ID扩展字段联合指示non-AP MLD将要与(目标)AP MLD 2之间建立的新链路的链路ID。Figure 2H is a schematic diagram of the new link ID information field in the STA information field format provided in an embodiment of the present application. The specific format of the new link ID information field is shown in Figure 2H, which includes a 4-bit link ID field and a 4-bit link ID extension field, wherein the link ID field can be used to indicate the identifier of a conventional link (that is, the link ID is equal to 0 to 14). When the identifier of the conventional link is not sufficient, the link ID field and the link ID extension field jointly indicate the link ID of the new link to be established between the non-AP MLD and the (target) AP MLD 2.
值得注意的是,前面示例中的漫游信息字段由重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的通用信息字段(Common Info field)携带,除此之外,漫游信息字段还可以由重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的STA信息字段携带,漫游信息字段的内容与上面通用信息字段(Common Info field)中的漫游信息字段一致,不再赘述。It is worth noting that the roaming information field in the previous example is carried by the Common Info field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element. In addition, the roaming information field can also be carried by the STA information field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element. The content of the roaming information field is consistent with the roaming information field in the Common Info field above and will not be repeated here.
链路重配置响应帧格式设计:Link reconfiguration response frame format design:
链路重配置响应帧的行动字段格式如下表4所示:The format of the action field of the link reconfiguration response frame is shown in Table 4 below:
表4:链路重配置响应帧操作字段格式
Table 4: Link Reconfiguration Response Frame Operation Field Format
对话令牌字段设置为相应仓库重配置请求帧中的对话令牌字段的值。计数子字段被设置为重配置状态列表子字段中的重配置状态双元的数量。重配置状态列表子字段包含一个或多个重配置状态双元。重配置状态双重子字段格式如图2I所示。The Dialog Token field is set to the value of the Dialog Token field in the corresponding Repository Reconfiguration Request frame. The Count subfield is set to the number of Reconfiguration Status binaries in the Reconfiguration Status List subfield. The Reconfiguration Status List subfield contains one or more Reconfiguration Status binaries. The format of the Reconfiguration Status binary subfield is shown in Figure 2I.
Link ID Info子字段的格式包含4位Link ID子字段和4位保留。Link ID Info子字段中的Link ID子字段表示对应的仓库重配置请求帧中指示增加或删除的AP的链路标识。Status子字段指示Link ID子字段对应的链路的链路重配置操作的状态,如表5(状态码)所示。下表5中所列的5个状态码为本申请实施例提出新增加的,具体作用见意义描述。The format of the Link ID Info subfield includes a 4-bit Link ID subfield and a 4-bit reserved field. The Link ID subfield in the Link ID Info subfield indicates the link identifier of the AP being added or deleted in the corresponding warehouse reconfiguration request frame. The Status subfield indicates the status of the link reconfiguration operation for the link corresponding to the Link ID subfield, as shown in Table 5 (Status Code). The five status codes listed in Table 5 below are newly added in the embodiments of this application. For their specific functions, see the meaning description.
表5:状态码
Table 5: Status Codes
图2J为本申请实施例提供的存在比特映像地图子字段的格式的示意图,图2K为本申请实施例提供的基本多链路元素的通用信息字段的格式的示意图。如果AP MLD接受了至少一个链路添加,则包含一个基本多链路元素,以便为与成功添加到non-AP MLD的链路设置的链路相对应的一个或多个AP提供每站点概述信息。否则,不包括基本多链路元素。基本多链路元素包括多链路控制字段,通用信息字段(Common Info field)和链路信息字段等字段,具体如下:基本多链路元素中多链路控制字段的存在比特映像地图子字段(Presence Bitmap subfield)的格式在图2J中定义。本申请实施例提出将基本多链路元素的存在比特映像地图子字段(Presence Bitmap subfield)的B7~B11中的任意一个bit(例如bit 7)定义为漫游信息存在字段。Figure 2J is a schematic diagram of the format of the presence bitmap subfield provided in an embodiment of the present application, and Figure 2K is a schematic diagram of the format of the common information field of the basic multilink element provided in an embodiment of the present application. If the AP MLD accepts at least one link addition, a basic multilink element is included to provide per-site overview information for one or more APs corresponding to the link settings successfully added to the non-AP MLD. Otherwise, the basic multilink element is not included. The basic multilink element includes fields such as the multilink control field, the common information field (Common Info field), and the link information field, as follows: The format of the presence bitmap subfield (Presence Bitmap subfield) of the multilink control field in the basic multilink element is defined in Figure 2J. The embodiment of the present application proposes to define any bit (for example, bit 7) from B7 to B11 of the presence bitmap subfield (Presence Bitmap subfield) of the basic multilink element as the roaming information presence field.
漫游信息存在用于指示图2K所示的基本多链路元素的通用信息字段(Common Info field)是否存在漫游信息字段,例如漫游信息存在等于0,代表图2K所示的基本多链路元素的通用信息字段(Common Info field)不存在漫游信息字段;漫游信息存在等于1,代表图2K所示的基本多链路元素的通用信息字段(Common Info field)存在漫游信息字段。The roaming information exists is used to indicate whether there is a roaming information field in the common information field (Common Info field) of the basic multi-link element shown in Figure 2K. For example, if the roaming information exists is equal to 0, it means that there is no roaming information field in the common information field (Common Info field) of the basic multi-link element shown in Figure 2K; if the roaming information exists is equal to 1, it means that there is a roaming information field in the common information field (Common Info field) of the basic multi-link element shown in Figure 2K.
基本多链路元素的通用信息字段(Common Info field)格式修改:值得注意的是,为了实现non-AP MLD向(当前)AP MLD 1请求进行漫游到(目标)AP MLD 2,本申请实施例提出图2K中基本多链路元素的通用信息字段(Common Info field)中MLD MAC地址应指示(目标)AP MLD 2的MLD MAC地址。基本多链路元素的通用信息字段(Common Info field)中的链路ID信息字段、BSS参数更改计数字段、介质同步延迟信息字段、EML能力字段、MLD能力和操作字段,AP MLD ID字段,扩展MLD能力和操作字段所指示的内容是指non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2之间的相关信息(具体内 容与IEEE 802.11be标准保持一致)。Modification of the format of the Common Info field of the basic multi-link element: It is worth noting that in order to enable non-AP MLD to request (current) AP MLD 1 to roam to (target) AP MLD 2, the embodiment of the present application proposes that the MLD MAC address in the Common Info field of the basic multi-link element in Figure 2K should indicate the MLD MAC address of (target) AP MLD 2. The contents indicated by the link ID information field, BSS parameter change count field, medium synchronization delay information field, EML capability field, MLD capability and operation field, AP MLD ID field, and extended MLD capability and operation field in the Common Info field of the basic multi-link element refer to the relevant information between non-AP MLD and (target) AP MLD 2 (specific content). content is consistent with the IEEE 802.11be standard).
基本多链路元素的通用信息字段(Common Info field)中的漫游信息字段是本申请实施例新增的字段,所指示的信息与前述重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的通用信息字段(Common Info field)中的漫游信息字段类似,但所指示的含义不同,具体如下:The roaming information field in the Common Info field of the basic multi-link element is a new field added in the embodiment of the present application. The information indicated is similar to the roaming information field in the Common Info field of the aforementioned reconfiguration multi-link element, but the indicated meaning is different, as follows:
信道和带宽:用于指示(目标)AP MLD 2所支持的信道信息(包括信道带宽,主信道编号,次信道编号等)。Channel and bandwidth: used to indicate the channel information supported by (target) AP MLD 2 (including channel bandwidth, primary channel number, secondary channel number, etc.).
RU分配:用于指示non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2进行通信所采用的RU信息。RU Allocation: Used to indicate the RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the (target) AP MLD 2.
功率限制(Power Limit):用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2进行通信所采用的发送功率信息(例如最大发送功率,最小发送功率等)。Power Limit: Used to indicate the transmit power information (such as maximum transmit power, minimum transmit power, etc.) used by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming to communicate with the (target) AP MLD 2.
Max TX/RX Nss:用于指示(目标)AP MLD 2所支持的最大发送或接收空间流(Spatial Stream)数目。Max TX/RX Nss: Used to indicate the maximum number of transmit or receive spatial streams supported by (target) AP MLD 2.
EDCA参数集:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD在(目标)AP MLD 2下所支持的EDCA参数集。EDCA parameter set: used to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming under (target) AP MLD 2.
EPCS信息:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD在(目标)AP MLD 2下支持的EPCS能力信息和/或订阅信息情况,还可用于non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2建立EPCS优先接入许可以及EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集。EPCS information: used to indicate the EPCS capability information and/or subscription information supported by the non-AP MLD initiating roaming under (target) AP MLD 2. It can also be used for the non-AP MLD to establish EPCS priority access permission and EDCA parameter set for EPCS priority access with (target) AP MLD 2.
BSR相关信息:用于指示发起(目标)AP MLD 2的缓存状态信息。BSR related information: used to indicate the cache status information of the initiating (target) AP MLD 2.
SN:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2之间的序号编号(Sequence Number)。SN: Used to indicate the sequence number between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and the (target) AP MLD 2.
PN:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2之间即将要发送的数据包编号(Packet Number)。PN: Used to indicate the packet number (Packet Number) to be sent between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and the (target) AP MLD 2.
BA会话:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2所建立的BlockAck会话信息。BA session: used to indicate the BlockAck session information established between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and the (target) AP MLD 2.
Multi-AP Mode:用于指示(目标)AP MLD 2所支持的多AP协作模式,例如C-TDMA,C-OFDMA,C-SR,C-BF,J-TX等。Multi-AP Mode: Used to indicate the multi-AP collaboration mode supported by (target) AP MLD 2, such as C-TDMA, C-OFDMA, C-SR, C-BF, J-TX, etc.
电量相关信息:用于指示发起(目标)AP MLD 2的休眠策略信息,例如休眠的窗口信息(开始休眠时间,休眠时长,休眠的窗口间隔时长等)和/或所支持的休眠机制等。Power-related information: used to indicate the sleep policy information of the initiating (target) AP MLD 2, such as the sleep window information (sleep start time, sleep duration, sleep window interval, etc.) and/or the supported sleep mechanisms.
TWT元素:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2之间建立的TWT信息。TWT element: Used to indicate the TWT information established between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and the (target) AP MLD 2.
R-TWT SP:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1之间建立的R-TWT SP信息。R-TWT SP: Used to indicate the R-TWT SP information established between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and the (current) AP MLD 1.
TID-to-Link映射:用于指示发起漫游的non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2之间建立TID-to-Link映射方案。TID-to-Link mapping: used to indicate the establishment of a TID-to-Link mapping scheme between the non-AP MLD initiating roaming and the (target) AP MLD 2.
扩展能力元素:用于指示(目标)AP MLD 2的扩展能力信息,具体内容见IEEE 802.11的基准标准规范。Extended capability element: used to indicate the extended capability information of (target) AP MLD 2. For details, see the IEEE 802.11 baseline standard specification.
EHT能力元素:用于指示(目标)AP MLD 2的极高吞吐量能力信息,具体内容见IEEE 802.11be标准规范。EHT capability element: used to indicate the extremely high throughput capability information of the (target) AP MLD 2. For details, see the IEEE 802.11be standard specification.
图2L为本申请实施例提供的每站点概述子元素的格式的示意图,基本多链路元素的链路信息字段格式修改:如果存在“链路信息”字段,则它由一个或多个每站点概述子元素以及其他可选子元素组成。每站点概述子元素(Per-STA Profile subelement)的格式如图2L所示。Figure 2L is a schematic diagram of the format of the Per-STA Profile subelement provided in an embodiment of the present application. The format of the Link Information field of the Basic Multilink element has been modified: if the "Link Information" field is present, it consists of one or more Per-STA Profile subelement(s) and other optional subelement(s). The format of the Per-STA Profile subelement is shown in Figure 2L.
基本多链路元素的STA控制字段格式如图2M所示,本申请实施例提出在B12~B15中任意一个比特(bit)定义为漫游信息存在字段,漫游信息存在用于指示图2N所示的基本多链路元素的STA信息字段是否存在漫游信息字段,例如漫游信息存在等于0,代表图2N所示的基本多链路元素的STA信息字段不存在漫游信息字段;漫游信息存在等于1,代表图2N所示的基本多链路元素的STA信息字段存在漫游信息字段。The STA control field format of the basic multi-link element is shown in Figure 2M. The embodiment of the present application proposes that any one bit in B12 to B15 is defined as a roaming information presence field. The roaming information presence is used to indicate whether the STA information field of the basic multi-link element shown in Figure 2N has a roaming information field. For example, if the roaming information presence is equal to 0, it means that the STA information field of the basic multi-link element shown in Figure 2N does not have a roaming information field; if the roaming information presence is equal to 1, it means that the STA information field of the basic multi-link element shown in Figure 2N has a roaming information field.
链路重配置响应帧中基本多链路元素的STA信息字段所携带的漫游信息字段与前述链路重配 置响应帧中基本多链路元素的通用信息字段(Common Info field)所携带的漫游信息字段一致,不再赘述。The roaming information field carried in the STA information field of the basic multilink element in the link reconfiguration response frame is consistent with the aforementioned link reconfiguration The roaming information field is consistent with the roaming information field carried in the common information field (Common Info field) of the basic multilink element in the configuration response frame, and is not repeated here.
注:漫游信息既可以在基本多链路元素的通用信息字段(Common Info field)中存在,也可以在基本多链路元素的STA信息字段中存在,实际中漫游信息只需要在两者之一中存在即可,不需要重复存在。Note: Roaming information can exist in both the Common Info field and the STA information field of the basic multi-link element. In practice, roaming information only needs to exist in one of the two fields and does not need to be repeated.
实施例1的好处:由non-AP MLD向当前AP MLD发起(漫游)AP MLD的切换。non-AP MLD在移动过程中对通信链路的质量变化感知较为及时,能够及时根据自身位置及与当前AP MLD之间的信号质量来发起漫游,从一定程度上降低了发起漫游的时延。Benefit of Example 1: Handover (roaming) from a non-AP MLD to the current AP MLD is initiated. The non-AP MLD is more aware of changes in communication link quality during mobility and can promptly initiate roaming based on its location and the signal quality between it and the current AP MLD, thus reducing roaming latency.
实施例2:(方式2)non-AP MLD向(目标)AP MLD 2请求进行漫游:Example 2: (Method 2) The non-AP MLD requests roaming from the (target) AP MLD 2:
如图2B中的方式2所示,non-AP MLD还可以直接(在link 1或link 2或link 3上,图中以link2为例)向(目标)AP MLD 2发送链路重配置请求帧,如果(目标)AP MLD 2成功接收到该帧,可以对该帧的接收质量(RSSI、CSI、SINR、SNR等指标)进行测量,并根据该帧的信息以及(目标)AP MLD 2自身的状态来决定是否接受non-AP MLD的漫游请求,然后在接收到链路重配置请求帧的链路上给non-AP MLD回复链路重配置响应帧。在此过程中,(当前)AP MLD 1与(目标)AP MLD 2之间要进行上下文迁移的操作,具体见本申请的一些实施例的设计。As shown in Method 2 in Figure 2B , the non-AP MLD can also directly send a Link Reconfiguration Request frame to (target) AP MLD 2 (on Link 1, Link 2, or Link 3, with Link 2 used as an example). If (target) AP MLD 2 successfully receives the frame, it can measure the frame's reception quality (RSSI, CSI, SINR, SNR, and other indicators) and decide whether to accept the non-AP MLD's roaming request based on the frame information and (target) AP MLD 2's own status. It then responds with a Link Reconfiguration Response frame to the non-AP MLD on the link that received the Link Reconfiguration Request frame. During this process, context migration is performed between (current) AP MLD 1 and (target) AP MLD 2. For details, see the design of some embodiments of this application.
该帧的接收质量,例如是RSSI大于或等于第一阈值(dBm)。第一阈值可以是预定义阈值。该帧的接收质量,例如是CSI的相关指标大于或等于第二阈值。第二阈值可以是预定义阈值。该帧的接收质量,例如是SINR大于或等于第三阈值(dB)。第三阈值可以是预定义阈值。该帧的接收质量,例如是SNR大于或等于第四阈值(dB)。第四阈值可以是预定义阈值。在一些实施例中,判断阈值还可以对应以上参数中部分或全部的加权求和的结果,即对相关参数预配置影响权重,加权求和后与预设阈值进行比较。The reception quality of the frame, for example, RSSI is greater than or equal to a first threshold (dBm). The first threshold may be a predefined threshold. The reception quality of the frame, for example, a related indicator of CSI is greater than or equal to a second threshold. The second threshold may be a predefined threshold. The reception quality of the frame, for example, SINR is greater than or equal to a third threshold (dB). The third threshold may be a predefined threshold. The reception quality of the frame, for example, SNR is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold (dB). The fourth threshold may be a predefined threshold. In some embodiments, the judgment threshold may also correspond to the result of a weighted summation of some or all of the above parameters, that is, pre-configuring influence weights for the relevant parameters, and comparing the weighted sum with the preset threshold.
链路重配置请求帧格式设计:Link reconfiguration request frame format design:
方式2下的链路重配置请求帧格式与方式1下的一样,不同之处在于方式2下该帧是发送给(目标)AP MLD 2的,而方式1下该帧是发送给(当前)AP MLD 1的,因此RA字段不同。此外,该帧格式中的部分字段指示的内容会有所区别,例如当重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的STA控制字段格式中的重配置操作类型指示为(次序)5,即切换链路的方式时,STA控制字段格式中的链路ID字段指示的是需要新建立的链路的标识符,而重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的STA信息字段的新增新链路信息字段指示的是要与(当前)AP MLD 1断开的链路的标识符。其余的内容与方式1下的设计一致,不再赘述。The Link Reconfiguration Request frame format for Mode 2 is the same as that for Mode 1. The difference is that in Mode 2, the frame is sent to (target) AP MLD 2, while in Mode 1, it is sent to (current) AP MLD 1, resulting in a different RA field. Additionally, some fields in the frame format indicate different content. For example, when the Reconfiguration Operation Type in the STA Control field format of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element indicates (Sequence) 5, indicating a link switch mode, the Link ID field in the STA Control field format indicates the identifier of the newly established link, while the New Link Information field in the STA Information field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element indicates the identifier of the link to be disconnected from (current) AP MLD 1. The remaining content is consistent with the design for Mode 1 and is not further described.
链路重配置响应帧格式设计:Link reconfiguration response frame format design:
方式2下的链路重配置响应帧格式与方式1下的一样,不同之处在于方式2下该帧是由(目标)AP MLD 2发送给non-AP MLD的,而方式1下该frame是由(当前)AP MLD 1发送给non-AP MLD的,因此TA字段不同,其余的内容与方式1下的设计一致,不再赘述。The link reconfiguration response frame format in mode 2 is the same as that in mode 1. The difference is that in mode 2, the frame is sent by (target) AP MLD 2 to non-AP MLD, while in mode 1, the frame is sent by (current) AP MLD 1 to non-AP MLD. Therefore, the TA field is different. The rest of the content is consistent with the design in mode 1 and will not be repeated here.
实施例2的好处:由non-AP MLD向目标AP MLD发起(漫游)AP MLD的切换。non-AP MLD在移动过程中对通信链路的质量变化感知较为及时,能够及时根据自身位置和信道状态来发起漫游,发起漫游的帧本身还可以进行与目标AP MLD之间的信号质量的测量,节省了额外的链路质量测量时间,降低了漫游的时延。Benefit of Example 2: Handover (roaming) from a non-AP MLD to a target AP MLD is initiated. The non-AP MLD is more aware of changes in communication link quality during mobility and can promptly initiate roaming based on its location and channel status. The roaming initiation frame itself can also measure the signal quality between the non-AP MLD and the target AP MLD, saving additional link quality measurement time and reducing roaming latency.
图3A为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法的流程示意图,如图3A所示,所述基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法,执行于接入点多链路设备AP MLD,其中,所述通信方法包括以下至少一个操作:操作301A:第一接入点多链路设备AP MLD 1向非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD发送第一链路重配置帧,进行漫游的发起操作。其中,所述第一链路重配置帧用于请求所述non-AP MLD由所述AP MLD 1漫游到第二接入点多链路设备AP MLD 2。操作302A:所述AP MLD 1接收所述non-AP MLD发送的第二链路重配置帧,以取得漫游的结果。FIG3A is a flow chart of a multi-link device roaming communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG3A , the multi-link device roaming communication method is executed on an access point multi-link device (AP MLD). The communication method includes at least one of the following operations: Operation 301A: A first access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 1 sends a first link reconfiguration frame to a non-AP MLD to initiate roaming. The first link reconfiguration frame is used to request the non-AP MLD to roam from AP MLD 1 to a second access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 2. Operation 302A: AP MLD 1 receives a second link reconfiguration frame sent by the non-AP MLD to obtain a roaming result.
通过上述技术方案,所述AP MLD 1向所述non-AP MLD发送第一链路重配置帧,进行漫游的 发起操作,以及所述AP MLD 1接收所述non-AP MLD发送的第二链路重配置帧,以取得漫游的结果,从而改善所述non-AP MLD漫游所述AP MLD 2时的体验,做到基本无中断的漫游。Through the above technical solution, the AP MLD 1 sends a first link reconfiguration frame to the non-AP MLD to perform roaming. The operation is initiated, and the AP MLD 1 receives the second link reconfiguration frame sent by the non-AP MLD to obtain a roaming result, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming to the AP MLD 2 and achieving substantially uninterrupted roaming.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述AP MLD 1进行漫游的发起操作时或所述AP MLD 1进行漫游的发起操作之前,所述AP MLD 1与所述AP MLD 2进行上下文迁移。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一链路重配置帧携带所述AP MLD 2的状态信息。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述通信方法,其中,还包括所述AP MLD 1向所述non-AP MLD发送链路重配置确认信息。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一链路重配置帧和所述第二链路重配置帧包括以下组合之一:请求发送RTS帧和清除发送CTS帧、探测请求帧和探测响应帧、多链路探测请求帧和多链路探测响应帧、或快速基本服务集切换FT请求帧和FT响应帧。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一链路重配置帧包括重配置多链路元素。In some embodiments of the present application, when the AP MLD 1 initiates a roaming operation or before the AP MLD 1 initiates a roaming operation, the AP MLD 1 performs context migration with the AP MLD 2. In some embodiments of the present application, the first link reconfiguration frame carries the status information of the AP MLD 2. In some embodiments of the present application, the communication method further includes the AP MLD 1 sending link reconfiguration confirmation information to the non-AP MLD. In some embodiments of the present application, the first link reconfiguration frame and the second link reconfiguration frame include one of the following combinations: a request to send RTS frame and a clear to send CTS frame, a probe request frame and a probe response frame, a multilink probe request frame and a multilink probe response frame, or a fast basic service set switching FT request frame and an FT response frame. In some embodiments of the present application, the first link reconfiguration frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述重配置多链路元素的存在比特映像地图子字段包括多链路设备MLD媒介接入控制MAC地址存在字段、增强多链路EML能力存在字段、MLD能力和操作存在字段、和/或漫游信息存在字段,其中:所述MLD MAC地址存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的通用信息字段是否存在MLD MAC地址字段;所述EML能力存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的通用信息字段是否存在EML能力字段;所述MLD能力和操作存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的通用信息字段是否存在MLD能力和操作字段;所述漫游信息存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的通用信息字段或链路信息字段是否存在漫游信息字段。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述重配置多链路元素的通用信息字段包括MLD MAC地址字段、EML能力字段、MLD能力和操作字段、和漫游信息字段,其中:所述MLD MAC地址字段用于指示所述AP MLD 2的MLD MAC地址;所述EML能力字段用于指示所述non-AP MLD的增强多链路信息;所述MLD能力和操作字段用于指示所述non-AP MLD的多链路能力信息和操作参数;所述漫游信息字段用于指示以下信息中的一个或多个:信道信息、资源调度信息、功率信息、最大发送/接收空间流数目、增强型分布式信道接入EDCA参数集、应急准备通信服务EPCS信息、缓存状态报告BSR信息、序号编号SN、数据包编号PN、块确认BA会话信息、多接入点AP模式、电量信息、目标唤醒时间TWT信息、限定目标唤醒时间服务阶段R-TWT SP信息、业务标识符到链路TID-to-Link的映射、扩展能力信息、和极高吞吐量EHT能力信息。In some embodiments of the present application, the existence bit map subfield of the reconfigured multi-link element includes a multi-link device MLD media access control MAC address existence field, an enhanced multi-link EML capability existence field, an MLD capability and operation existence field, and/or a roaming information existence field, wherein: the MLD MAC address existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an MLD MAC address field; the EML capability existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an EML capability field; the MLD capability and operation existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an MLD capability and operation field; the roaming information existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field or link information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has a roaming information field. In some embodiments of the present application, the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element includes an MLD MAC address field, an EML capability field, an MLD capability and operation field, and a roaming information field, wherein: the MLD MAC address field is used to indicate the MLD MAC address of the AP MLD 2; the EML capability field is used to indicate the enhanced multi-link information of the non-AP MLD; the MLD capability and operation field is used to indicate the multi-link capability information and operation parameters of the non-AP MLD; the roaming information field is used to indicate one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set, emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information, buffer status report BSR information, sequence number SN, data packet number PN, block acknowledgment BA session information, multi-access point AP mode, power information, target wake-up time TWT information, target wake-up time service phase R-TWT SP information, service identifier to link TID-to-Link mapping, extended capability information, and extremely high throughput EHT capability information.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述信道信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的信道信息和/或所述non-AP MLD建立的链路对应的信道信息;所述资源调度信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的资源单元RU信息;所述功率信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的发送功率信息;所述最大发送/接收空间流数目用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的最大发送/接收空间流数目;所述增强型分布式信道接入EDCA参数集用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的EDCA参数集或用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的EDCA参数集;所述应急准备通信服务EPCS信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的EPCS能力信息、EPCS订阅信息和EPCS开启状态信息,和/或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2建立EPCS优先接入许可以及EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集;所述缓存状态报告BSR信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的缓存状态信息;所述序号编号SN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间的帧的SN;所述数据包编号PN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间已经发送完成的PN,或即将要发送的PN,或未发送的PN;所述块确认BA会话信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的块确认会话信息;所述多接入点AP模式用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的多AP协作模式;所述电量信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的休眠策略信息和/或所支持的休眠机制;所述目标唤醒时间TWT信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TWT信息;所述限定目标唤醒时间服务阶段R-TWT SP信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的R-TWT SP信息;所述业务标识符到链路TID-to-Link的映射用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TID-to-Link的映射方案,或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2之间建立的链路的TID-to-Link的映射方案;所述扩展能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的扩展能力信息;所述极高吞吐量EHT能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的EHT能力信息。In some embodiments of the present application, the channel information is used to indicate the channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or the channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD; the resource scheduling information is used to indicate the resource unit RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the power information is used to indicate the transmit power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD; the enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD or to indicate the EDCA parameter set established by the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information is used to indicate the EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or to indicate the non-AP MLD requesting communication with the AP MLD 2. Establishing an EPCS priority access grant and an EDCA parameter set for EPCS priority access; the buffer status report (BSR) information is used to indicate the buffer status information of the non-AP MLD; the sequence number (SN) is used to indicate the SN of the frame between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the packet number (PN) is used to indicate the PN that has been sent, is about to be sent, or has not been sent between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the block acknowledgement (BA) session information is used to indicate the block acknowledgement session information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the multi-access point (AP) mode is used to indicate the multi-AP cooperation mode supported by the non-AP MLD; the power information is used to indicate the sleep policy information and/or supported sleep mechanism of the non-AP MLD; the target wake-up time (TWT) information is used to indicate the TWT information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the target wake-up time service phase (R-TWT) SP information is used to indicate the R-TWT established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1. SP information; the mapping of the service identifier to the link TID-to-Link is used to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or to indicate the non-AP MLD request and the AP The TID-to-Link mapping scheme of the link established between MLD 2; the extended capability information is used to indicate the extended capability information of the non-AP MLD; the extremely high throughput EHT capability information is used to indicate the EHT capability information of the non-AP MLD.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述重配置多链路元素包括每站点概述子元素用于携带发起漫游的所述non-AP MLD的概述信息。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述每站点概述子元素包括STA控制字段,所述STA控制字段包括链路标识符ID字段、重配置操作类型字段、新链路ID存在字段、和/或漫游信息存在字段,其中:所述链路ID字段用于指示链路ID;所述新链路ID存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的STA信息字段是否存在新链路ID信息字段;所述漫游信息存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的链路信息字段是否存在漫游信息字段。In some embodiments of the present application, the reconfiguration multi-link element includes a per-site summary sub-element for carrying summary information of the non-AP MLD that initiated roaming. In some embodiments of the present application, the per-site summary sub-element includes a STA control field, and the STA control field includes a link identifier ID field, a reconfiguration operation type field, a new link ID exists field, and/or a roaming information exists field, wherein: the link ID field is used to indicate the link ID; the new link ID exists field is used to indicate whether a new link ID information field exists in the STA information field of the reconfiguration multi-link element; and the roaming information exists field is used to indicate whether a roaming information field exists in the link information field of the reconfiguration multi-link element.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述重配置操作类型字段指示的值为5时,所述重配置操作类型字段设置为切换链路的意义/操作。在本申请的一些实施例中,当所述重配置操作类型字段指示为切换链路字段和/或所述STA控制字段的新链路ID存在字段指示为存在时,所述STA控制字段中的链路ID字段指示为所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1断开的链路ID,所述新链路ID信息字段指示为所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间建立连接的链路ID。在本申请的一些实施例中,当所述重配置操作类型字段指示为切换链路字段和/或所述STA控制字段的新链路ID存在字段指示为存在时,所述STA控制字段中的链路ID字段指示为所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间建立连接的链路ID,所述新链路ID信息字段指示为所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1断开的链路ID。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述新链路ID信息字段包括链路ID字段,所述链路ID字段用于指示链路的标识符,其中,所述新链路ID信息字段还包括链路ID扩展字段,所述链路ID字段和所述链路ID扩展字段联合指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间建立的新链路ID。In some embodiments of the present application, when the value indicated by the Reconfiguration Operation Type field is 5, the Reconfiguration Operation Type field is set to the meaning/operation of switching links. In some embodiments of the present application, when the Reconfiguration Operation Type field indicates the Switch Link field and/or the New Link ID Existence field of the STA Control field indicates presence, the Link ID field in the STA Control field indicates the ID of the link disconnected between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 1, and the New Link ID Information field indicates the ID of the link established between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 2. In some embodiments of the present application, when the Reconfiguration Operation Type field indicates the Switch Link field and/or the New Link ID Existence field of the STA Control field indicates presence, the Link ID field in the STA Control field indicates the ID of the link established between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 2, and the New Link ID Information field indicates the ID of the link disconnected between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 1. In some embodiments of the present application, the new link ID information field includes a link ID field, which is used to indicate an identifier of the link, wherein the new link ID information field also includes a link ID extension field, and the link ID field and the link ID extension field jointly indicate a new link ID established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二链路重配置帧包括重配置状态列表字段。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述重配置状态列表字段包括一个或多个重配置状态双重子字段,所述重配置状态双重子字段包括链路ID信息字段和状态字段。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述链路ID信息字段包括链路ID子字段,所述链路ID子字段指示AP的链路ID,在所述第一链路重配置帧中指示添加或删除所述AP的所述链路ID。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述状态字段包括第一状态码、第二状态码、第三状态码、第四状态码、和/或第五状态码,其中,第一状态码用于指示漫游请求被拒绝,因为所述AP MLD 2的BSS负载大于第一设定值,第二状态码用于指示漫游请求被拒绝,因为建立链路的信道负载大于第二设定值,第三状态码用于指示漫游请求被拒绝,因为请求建立链路的时间与所述AP MLD 2允许建立链路的窗口不匹配,第四状态码用于指示将进入休眠状态,暂不接受漫游请求,第五状态码用于指示漫游请求被拒绝,因为所述AP MLD 2已达最大支持的STA/non-AP MLD的数量。In some embodiments of the present application, the second link reconfiguration frame includes a reconfiguration status list field. In some embodiments of the present application, the reconfiguration status list field includes one or more reconfiguration status dual subfields, each of which includes a link ID information field and a status field. In some embodiments of the present application, the link ID information field includes a link ID subfield, each of which indicates a link ID of an AP, and indicates whether the link ID of the AP is added or deleted in the first link reconfiguration frame. In some embodiments of the present application, the status field includes a first status code, a second status code, a third status code, a fourth status code, and/or a fifth status code, wherein the first status code is used to indicate that the roaming request is rejected because the BSS load of the AP MLD 2 is greater than a first set value, the second status code is used to indicate that the roaming request is rejected because the channel load for establishing a link is greater than a second set value, the third status code is used to indicate that the roaming request is rejected because the time for requesting to establish a link does not match the window in which the AP MLD 2 is allowed to establish a link, the fourth status code is used to indicate that the roaming request will enter a sleep state and will not accept roaming requests for the time being, and the fifth status code is used to indicate that the roaming request is rejected because the AP MLD 2 has reached the maximum number of supported STAs/non-AP MLDs.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二链路重配置帧还包括基本多链路元素,所述基本多链路元素的存在比特映像地图字段包括漫游信息存在字段,其中,所述漫游信息存在字段用于指示所述基本多链路元素的通用信息字段或链路信息字段是否存在漫游信息字段。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述基本多链路元素的所述通用信息字段包括MLD MAC地址字段,用于指示所述AP MLD 2的MLD MAC地址。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述基本多链路元素的所述通用信息字段还包括链路ID信息字段、BSS参数更改计数字段、媒介同步延迟信息字段、EML能力字段、MLD能力和操作字段、AP MLD ID字段、和/或扩展MLD能力和操作字段,所述链路ID信息字段、所述BSS参数更改计数字段、所述媒介同步延迟信息字段、所述EML能力字段、所述MLD能力和操作字段、所述AP MLD ID字段、和/或所述扩展MLD能力和操作字段指示的内容是指所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间的相关信息。In some embodiments of the present application, the second link reconfiguration frame further includes a basic multilink element, wherein the presence bitmap field of the basic multilink element includes a roaming information presence field, wherein the roaming information presence field is used to indicate whether a roaming information field exists in the general information field or link information field of the basic multilink element. In some embodiments of the present application, the general information field of the basic multilink element includes an MLD MAC address field, which is used to indicate the MLD MAC address of AP MLD 2. In some embodiments of the present application, the general information field of the basic multilink element further includes a link ID information field, a BSS parameter change count field, a media synchronization delay information field, an EML capability field, an MLD capability and operation field, an AP MLD ID field, and/or an extended MLD capability and operation field, wherein the link ID information field, the BSS parameter change count field, the media synchronization delay information field, the EML capability field, the MLD capability and operation field, the AP MLD ID field, and/or the extended MLD capability and operation field indicate related information between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 2.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述漫游信息字段用于指示以下信息中的一个或多个:信道信息、资源调度信息、功率信息、最大发送/接收空间流数目、EDCA参数集、EPCS信息、BSR信息、SN、PN、BA会话信息、多AP模式、电量信息、TWT信息、R-TWT SP信息、TID-to-Link的映射、扩展能力信息、和EHT能力信息,其中:所述信道信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的信道信息 和/或所述non-AP MLD建立的链路对应的信道信息;所述资源调度信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的RU信息;所述功率信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的发送功率信息;所述最大发送/接收空间流数目用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的最大发送/接收空间流数目;所述EDCA参数集用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的EDCA参数集或用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的EDCA参数集;所述EPCS信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的EPCS能力信息、EPCS订阅信息和EPCS开启状态信息,和/或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2建立EPCS优先接入许可以及EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集;所述BSR信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的缓存状态信息;所述SN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间的帧的SN;所述PN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间已经发送完成的PN,或即将要发送的PN,或未发送的PN;所述BA会话信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的块确认会话信息;所述多AP模式用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的多AP协作模式;所述电量信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的休眠策略信息和/或所支持的休眠机制;所述TWT信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TWT信息;所述R-TWT SP信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的R-TWT SP信息;所述TID-to-Link的映射用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TID-to-Link的映射方案,或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2之间建立的链路的TID-to-Link的映射方案;所述扩展能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的扩展能力信息;所述EHT能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的EHT能力信息。In some embodiments of the present application, the roaming information field is used to indicate one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, EDCA parameter set, EPCS information, BSR information, SN, PN, BA session information, multi-AP mode, power information, TWT information, R-TWT SP information, TID-to-Link mapping, extended capability information, and EHT capability information, wherein: the channel information is used to indicate the channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD; the resource scheduling information is used to indicate RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the power information is used to indicate transmit power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD; the EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD or to indicate the EDCA parameter set established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the EPCS information is used to indicate EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information, and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or to indicate the EDCA parameter set for the non-AP MLD to request to establish EPCS priority access permission and EPCS priority access with the AP MLD 2; the BSR information is used to indicate cache status information of the non-AP MLD; and the SN is used to indicate the cache status information of the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the PN is used to indicate the PN that has been sent between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or the PN that is about to be sent, or the PN that has not been sent; the BA session information is used to indicate the block confirmation session information established by the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the multi-AP mode is used to indicate the multi-AP cooperation mode supported by the non-AP MLD; the power information is used to indicate the sleep policy information and/or the supported sleep mechanism of the non-AP MLD; the TWT information is used to indicate the TWT information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the R-TWT SP information is used to indicate the R-TWT SP information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the TID-to-Link mapping is used to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or for indicating the non-AP MLD request and the AP MLD 2; the extended capability information is used to indicate the extended capability information of the non-AP MLD; the EHT capability information is used to indicate the EHT capability information of the non-AP MLD.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述基本多链路元素的链路信息字段包括每站点概述子元素,所述每站点概述子元素包括STA控制字段,所述STA控制字段包括漫游信息存在字段。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述漫游信息存在字段用于指示所述基本多链路元素的链路信息字段是否存在漫游信息字段。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述通信方法还包括所述AP MLD 1启动定时器,以确认所述AP MLD 1发送所述第一链路重配置帧和所述AP MLD 1接收所述第二链路重配置帧之间的时间间隔。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述AP MLD 1发送所述第一链路重配置帧后,启动所述定时器,如果所述AP MLD 1在所述定时器对应的时间内,接收所述第二链路重配置帧,则所述AP MLD 1通过所述第二链路重配置帧判断是否进行漫游。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述AP MLD 1发送所述第一链路重配置帧后,启动所述定时器,如果所述AP MLD 1在所述定时器对应的时间内,未接收所述第二链路重配置帧,则所述AP MLD 1判断漫游失败。In some embodiments of the present application, the link information field of the basic multi-link element includes a per-site overview sub-element, the per-site overview sub-element includes an STA control field, and the STA control field includes a roaming information presence field. In some embodiments of the present application, the roaming information presence field is used to indicate whether a roaming information field exists in the link information field of the basic multi-link element. In some embodiments of the present application, the communication method further includes the AP MLD 1 starting a timer to confirm the time interval between the AP MLD 1 sending the first link reconfiguration frame and the AP MLD 1 receiving the second link reconfiguration frame. In some embodiments of the present application, after the AP MLD 1 sends the first link reconfiguration frame, the timer is started. If the AP MLD 1 receives the second link reconfiguration frame within the time corresponding to the timer, the AP MLD 1 determines whether to roam based on the second link reconfiguration frame. In some embodiments of the present application, after the AP MLD 1 sends the first link reconfiguration frame, the timer is started. If the AP MLD 1 does not receive the second link reconfiguration frame within the time corresponding to the timer, the AP MLD 1 determines that the roaming has failed.
实施例3:当前AP MLD发起漫游的方法:Example 3: Method for the current AP MLD to initiate roaming:
如图3B所示,(当前)AP MLD 1主动给non-AP MLD发起漫游的情况下,说明non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1之间的链路质量不佳,或者(当前)AP MLD 1测量获知non-AP MLD正在远离(当前)AP MLD 1(靠近(目标)AP MLD 2)。那么(当前)AP MLD 1在帮non-AP MLD发起漫游时,或(当前)AP MLD 1在向non-AP MLD发起漫游前先与(目标)AP MLD 2进行上下文迁移(详见本申请的一些实施例)。As shown in Figure 3B , when (current) AP MLD 1 proactively initiates roaming for a non-AP MLD, this indicates that the link quality between the non-AP MLD and (current) AP MLD 1 is poor, or (current) AP MLD 1 measures that the non-AP MLD is moving away from (current) AP MLD 1 (approaching (target) AP MLD 2). Therefore, when (current) AP MLD 1 initiates roaming for the non-AP MLD, or before initiating roaming for the non-AP MLD, AP MLD 1 first performs context migration with (target) AP MLD 2 (see some embodiments of this application for details).
(当前)AP MLD 1发起(non-AP MLD的)漫游的步骤如下:The steps for (current) AP MLD 1 to initiate roaming (for non-AP MLD) are as follows:
步骤1:(当前)AP MLD 1向non-AP MLD(在link 1上)发送链路重配置请求帧,并可能携带上推荐的(目标)AP MLD 2的信息。Step 1: (Current) AP MLD 1 sends a Link Reconfiguration Request frame to the non-AP MLD (on link 1), which may also carry information about the recommended (target) AP MLD 2.
步骤2(可选的):如果non-AP MLD此前未获得其与(目标)AP MLD 2之间的链路状态信息,则可以在漫游后要建立的链路上(图中以link 2为例)向(目标)AP MLD 2发送请求帧1;如果non-AP MLD此前获得了与(目标)AP MLD 2之间的链路状态信息则不需要发送该帧。Step 2 (optional): If the non-AP MLD has not previously obtained the link status information between it and (target) AP MLD 2, it can send a request frame 1 to (target) AP MLD 2 on the link to be established after roaming (link 2 is used as an example in the figure); if the non-AP MLD has previously obtained the link status information between it and (target) AP MLD 2, it does not need to send this frame.
步骤3(可选的):如果步骤2中目标AP MLD 2收到了non-AP MLD发送的请求帧1,则会给在接收到请求帧1的链路上non-AP MLD回复响应帧1。non-AP MLD通过接收到的响应帧1的质量(例如RSSI、CSI、SINR、SNR等指标)来判断是否要漫游到目标AP MLD 2。Step 3 (optional): If target AP MLD 2 receives the request frame 1 sent by the non-AP MLD in step 2, it replies with a response frame 1 to the non-AP MLD on the link that received the request frame 1. The non-AP MLD determines whether to roam to target AP MLD 2 based on the quality of the received response frame 1 (such as RSSI, CSI, SINR, SNR, etc.).
注:与上述的一些实施例类似,此时请求帧1和响应帧1可以为以下组合中的其中一个: Note: Similar to some of the above embodiments, the request frame 1 and the response frame 1 can be one of the following combinations:
请求帧1是RTS帧,响应帧1是CTS帧。The request frame 1 is an RTS frame, and the response frame 1 is a CTS frame.
请求帧1是探测请求帧,响应帧1是探测响应帧。The request frame 1 is a probe request frame, and the response frame 1 is a probe response frame.
请求帧1是多链路探测请求帧,响应帧1是多链路探测响应帧。The request frame 1 is a multi-link detection request frame, and the response frame 1 is a multi-link detection response frame.
请求帧1是FT请求帧,响应帧1是FT响应帧。The request frame 1 is an FT request frame, and the response frame 1 is an FT response frame.
接收到的响应帧1的质量,例如是RSSI大于或等于第一阈值(dBm)。第一阈值可以是预定义阈值。接收到的响应帧1的质量,例如是CSI的相关指标大于或等于第二阈值。第二阈值可以是预定义阈值。接收到的响应帧1的质量,例如是SINR大于或等于第三阈值(dB)。第三阈值可以是预定义阈值。接收到的响应帧1的质量,例如是SNR大于或等于第四阈值(dB)。第四阈值可以是预定义阈值。在一些实施例中,判断阈值还可以对应以上参数中部分或全部的加权求和的结果,即对相关参数预配置影响权重,加权求和后与预设阈值进行比较。The quality of the received response frame 1, for example, RSSI is greater than or equal to the first threshold (dBm). The first threshold may be a predefined threshold. The quality of the received response frame 1, for example, the relevant index of CSI is greater than or equal to the second threshold. The second threshold may be a predefined threshold. The quality of the received response frame 1, for example, SINR is greater than or equal to the third threshold (dB). The third threshold may be a predefined threshold. The quality of the received response frame 1, for example, SNR is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold (dB). The fourth threshold may be a predefined threshold. In some embodiments, the judgment threshold may also correspond to the result of the weighted summation of some or all of the above parameters, that is, the influence weights are preconfigured for the relevant parameters, and the weighted sum is compared with the preset threshold.
此外,还可以在non-AP MLD未向目标AP MLD 2发送请求帧1的情况下,目标AP MLD 2主动向non-AP MLD发送响应帧1,non-AP MLD通过接收到的响应帧1的质量(例如RSSI、CSI、SINR、SNR等指标)来判断是否要漫游到目标AP MLD 2。此时响应帧1可以为信标帧。In addition, if the non-AP MLD does not send a request frame 1 to the target AP MLD 2, the target AP MLD 2 can proactively send a response frame 1 to the non-AP MLD. The non-AP MLD determines whether to roam to the target AP MLD 2 based on the quality of the received response frame 1 (such as RSSI, CSI, SINR, SNR, etc.). In this case, the response frame 1 can be a beacon frame.
接收到的响应帧1的质量,例如是RSSI大于或等于第一阈值(dBm)。第一阈值可以是预定义阈值。接收到的响应帧1的质量,例如是CSI的相关指标大于或等于第二阈值。第二阈值可以是预定义阈值。接收到的响应帧1的质量,例如是SINR大于或等于第三阈值(dB)。第三阈值可以是预定义阈值。接收到的响应帧1的质量,例如是SNR大于或等于第四阈值(dB)。第四阈值可以是预定义阈值。在一些实施例中,判断阈值还可以对应以上参数中部分或全部的加权求和的结果,即对相关参数预配置影响权重,加权求和后与预设阈值进行比较。The quality of the received response frame 1, for example, RSSI is greater than or equal to the first threshold (dBm). The first threshold may be a predefined threshold. The quality of the received response frame 1, for example, the relevant index of CSI is greater than or equal to the second threshold. The second threshold may be a predefined threshold. The quality of the received response frame 1, for example, SINR is greater than or equal to the third threshold (dB). The third threshold may be a predefined threshold. The quality of the received response frame 1, for example, SNR is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold (dB). The fourth threshold may be a predefined threshold. In some embodiments, the judgment threshold may also correspond to the result of the weighted summation of some or all of the above parameters, that is, the influence weights are preconfigured for the relevant parameters, and the weighted sum is compared with the preset threshold.
步骤4:non-AP MLD(在link 1上)向(当前)AP MLD 1响应链路重配置响应帧指示其是否接受漫游的请求,以及所接受的参数/信息有哪些。Step 4: The non-AP MLD (on link 1) responds with a link reconfiguration response frame to the (current) AP MLD 1 to indicate whether it accepts the roaming request and what parameters/information it accepts.
注:(当前)AP MLD 1可能基于接收到的non-AP MLD在链路重配置响应帧发送的信息,再次与(目标)AP MLD 2进行上下文迁移,确定下最终non-AP MLD切换到(目标)AP MLD 2后的参数/信息。Note: (Current) AP MLD 1 may perform context migration again with (target) AP MLD 2 based on the information sent by the received non-AP MLD in the link reconfiguration response frame to determine the final parameters/information after the non-AP MLD switches to the (target) AP MLD 2.
步骤5(可选的):由于(当前)AP MLD 1在步骤1中发起的链路重配置请求帧中所包含的信息只被non-AP MLD部分采纳(或non-AP MLD推荐了新的参数)并在步骤4中通过链路重配置响应帧进行反馈,那么(当前)AP MLD 1此时还需要对最终建立的链路信息/参数信息进行确定,因此给non-AP MLD(在link 1上)发送链路重配置确认帧(Link Reconfiguration Confirm frame)。Step 5 (optional): Since the information contained in the Link Reconfiguration Request frame initiated by (current) AP MLD 1 in step 1 was only partially adopted by the non-AP MLD (or the non-AP MLD recommended new parameters) and fed back through the Link Reconfiguration Response frame in step 4, (current) AP MLD 1 still needs to confirm the final link information/parameter information established at this time, so it sends a Link Reconfiguration Confirm frame to the non-AP MLD (on link 1).
注:如果non-AP MLD在步骤4中完全采纳了步骤1中给的参数/配置,则(当前)AP MLD 1不需要再向non-AP MLD发送链路重配置确认帧。NOTE: If the non-AP MLD fully adopts the parameters/configuration given in step 1 in step 4, then (current) AP MLD 1 does not need to send a link reconfiguration confirmation frame to the non-AP MLD.
链路重配置请求帧格式设计:Link reconfiguration request frame format design:
该实施例下的链路重配置请求帧格式与实施例1下的一样,不同之处在于该实施例中链路重配置请求帧是由(当前)AP MLD 1发送给non-AP MLD的,因此TA和RA字段不同。其余字段和对应的含义详细见实施例1的设计,不再赘述。与实施例1的不同之处在于,该帧格式中的字段指示的内容是(目标)AP MLD 2所对应的信息。The Link Reconfiguration Request frame format in this embodiment is the same as that in Example 1. The difference is that in this embodiment, the Link Reconfiguration Request frame is sent from (current) AP MLD 1 to the non-AP MLD, so the TA and RA fields are different. The remaining fields and their corresponding meanings are detailed in the design of Example 1 and are not repeated here. The difference from Example 1 is that the fields in this frame format indicate the content corresponding to (target) AP MLD 2.
链路重配置响应帧格式设计:Link reconfiguration response frame format design:
该实施例下的链路重配置响应帧格式与实施例1下的一样,不同之处在于该实施例中链路重配置响应帧是由non-AP MLD发送给的(当前)AP MLD 1,因此TA和RA字段不同。其余字段和对应的含义详细见实施例1的设计,不再赘述。与实施例1的不同之处在于,该帧格式中的字段指示的内容是non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2之间的信息,且指示non-AP MLD所接受的参数/配置信息,或指示non-AP MLD所推荐的参数/配置信息。The Link Reconfiguration Response frame format in this embodiment is the same as that in Example 1, except that in this embodiment, the Link Reconfiguration Response frame is sent by the non-AP MLD to (current) AP MLD 1, resulting in different TA and RA fields. The remaining fields and their corresponding meanings are detailed in Example 1 and are not further described. Unlike Example 1, the fields in this frame format indicate information between the non-AP MLD and (target) AP MLD 2, and indicate parameters/configuration information accepted by the non-AP MLD or parameters/configuration information recommended by the non-AP MLD.
链路重配置确认帧(Link Reconfiguration Confirm frame)格式设计:Link Reconfiguration Confirm frame format design:
该实施例下的链路重配置确认帧(Link Reconfiguration Confirm frame)格式与实施例1下的链路重配置响应帧格式一样,不同之处在于该实施例中链路重配置确认帧(Link Reconfiguration Confirm frame)是由(当前)AP MLD 1发送给non-AP MLD的,因此TA和RA字段不同。其余字段和对应的 含义详细见实施例1的设计,不再赘述。与实施例1的链路重配置响应帧不同之处在于,该帧格式中的字段指示的内容是non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2之间的信息,且指示(目标)AP MLD 2基于non-AP MLD所发送的链路重配置响应帧最终确定下来的参数/配置信息。区别方式是通过前述图2K上,基本多链路元素的通用信息字段(Common Info field)格式的MLD MAC地址,这里MLD MAC地址填充的是(目标)AP MLD 2的MAC地址,而不是(当前)AP MLD 1的MAC地址,因此non-AP MLD可以知晓这个链路重配置响应帧里面指示的是(目标)AP MLD 2的参数/配置。The format of the Link Reconfiguration Confirm frame in this embodiment is the same as that of the Link Reconfiguration Response frame in Example 1. The difference is that the Link Reconfiguration Confirm frame in this embodiment is sent by (current) AP MLD 1 to non-AP MLD, so the TA and RA fields are different. The remaining fields are the same as those in the corresponding The meaning is detailed in the design of Example 1 and will not be repeated here. The difference from the link reconfiguration response frame of Example 1 is that the fields in this frame format indicate the information between the non-AP MLD and the (target) AP MLD 2, and indicate the parameters/configuration information finally determined by the (target) AP MLD 2 based on the link reconfiguration response frame sent by the non-AP MLD. The difference is that the MLD MAC address in the Common Info field format of the basic multi-link element in Figure 2K is filled with the MAC address of the (target) AP MLD 2 instead of the MAC address of the (current) AP MLD 1. Therefore, the non-AP MLD can know that the parameters/configuration indicated in this link reconfiguration response frame are those of the (target) AP MLD 2.
实施例3的好处:由当前AP MLD向non-AP MLD发起(漫游)AP MLD的切换。当前AP MLD可以在接收non-AP MLD的数据/信号过程中及时获知两者之间链路的质量,帮助non-AP MLD发起漫游,一方面可以提前于non-AP MLD发起漫游,降低漫游时延。另一方面当前AP MLD在负载较重时,还可以根据环境信息(例如non-AP MLD的信道状态信息,目标AP MLD的负载信息等)让non-AP MLD被(负载较轻的)更合适的目标AP MLD服务,在一定程度上达到了负载均衡的效果。Benefits of Example 3: Handover (roaming) from the current AP MLD to the non-AP MLD is initiated. The current AP MLD can promptly learn the link quality between the current and non-AP MLD while receiving data/signals from the non-AP MLD, helping the non-AP MLD initiate roaming. This allows the current AP MLD to initiate roaming earlier than the non-AP MLD, reducing roaming latency. Furthermore, when the current AP MLD is heavily loaded, the current AP MLD can, based on environmental information (e.g., the non-AP MLD's channel state information, target AP MLD load information, etc.), ensure that the non-AP MLD is served by a more appropriate target AP MLD (with a lighter load), achieving load balancing to a certain extent.
图4A为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法的流程示意图,如图4A所示,所述基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法,执行于接入点多链路设备AP MLD,其中,所述通信方法包括以下至少一个操作:操作401A:第二接入点多链路设备AP MLD 2向非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD发送第一链路重配置帧,进行漫游的发起操作。其中,所述第一链路重配置帧用于请求所述non-AP MLD由第一接入点多链路设备AP MLD 1漫游到所述AP MLD 2。操作402A:所述AP MLD 2接收所述non-AP MLD发送的第二链路重配置帧,以取得漫游的结果。FIG4A is a flow chart of a multi-link device roaming communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG4A , the multi-link device roaming communication method is executed on an access point multi-link device (AP MLD). The communication method includes at least one of the following operations: Operation 401A: The second access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 2 sends a first link reconfiguration frame to a non-AP MLD to initiate roaming. The first link reconfiguration frame is used to request the non-AP MLD to roam from the first access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 1 to the AP MLD 2. Operation 402A: The AP MLD 2 receives the second link reconfiguration frame sent by the non-AP MLD to obtain a roaming result.
通过上述技术方案,所述AP MLD 2向所述non-AP MLD发送第一链路重配置帧,进行漫游的发起操作,以及所述AP MLD 2接收所述non-AP MLD发送的第二链路重配置帧,以取得漫游的结果,从而改善所述non-AP MLD漫游所述AP MLD 2时的体验,做到基本无中断的漫游。Through the above technical solution, the AP MLD 2 sends a first link reconfiguration frame to the non-AP MLD to initiate roaming, and the AP MLD 2 receives a second link reconfiguration frame sent by the non-AP MLD to obtain the roaming result, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming on the AP MLD 2 and achieving basically uninterrupted roaming.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述AP MLD 2进行漫游的发起操作时或所述AP MLD 2进行漫游的发起操作之前,所述AP MLD 2与所述AP MLD 1进行上下文迁移。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述AP MLD 2向所述non-AP MLD发送所述第一链路重配置帧,以请求切换链路,所述第一链路重配置帧包括所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间的断开链路的信息和所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间的建立链路的信息。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述AP MLD 2向所述non-AP MLD发送所述第一链路重配置帧,以请求添加链路,所述第一链路重配置帧包括所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间的建立链路的信息。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一链路重配置帧和所述第二链路重配置帧包括以下组合之一:请求发送RTS帧和清除发送CTS帧、探测请求帧和探测响应帧、多链路探测请求帧和多链路探测响应帧、或快速基本服务集切换FT请求帧和快速基本服务集切换FT响应帧。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一链路重配置帧包括重配置多链路元素。In some embodiments of the present application, when AP MLD 2 initiates roaming or before AP MLD 2 initiates roaming, AP MLD 2 performs context migration with AP MLD 1. In some embodiments of the present application, AP MLD 2 sends the first link reconfiguration frame to the non-AP MLD to request link switching. The first link reconfiguration frame includes information about disconnecting the link between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 1 and establishing a link between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 2. In some embodiments of the present application, AP MLD 2 sends the first link reconfiguration frame to the non-AP MLD to request adding a link. The first link reconfiguration frame includes information about establishing a link between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 2. In some embodiments of the present application, the first link reconfiguration frame and the second link reconfiguration frame include one of the following combinations: a request to send (RTS) frame and a clear to send (CTS) frame, a probe request frame and a probe response frame, a multilink probe request frame and a multilink probe response frame, or a fast basic service set switching (FT) request frame and a fast basic service set switching (FT) response frame. In some embodiments of the present application, the first link reconfiguration frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述重配置多链路元素的存在比特映像地图子字段包括多链路设备MLD媒介接入控制MAC地址存在字段、增强多链路EML能力存在字段、MLD能力和操作存在字段、和/或漫游信息存在字段,其中:所述MLD MAC地址存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的通用信息字段是否存在MLD MAC地址字段;所述EML能力存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的通用信息字段是否存在EML能力字段;所述MLD能力和操作存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的通用信息字段是否存在MLD能力和操作字段;所述漫游信息存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的通用信息字段或链路信息字段是否存在漫游信息字段。In some embodiments of the present application, the existence bit map subfield of the reconfigured multi-link element includes a multi-link device MLD media access control MAC address existence field, an enhanced multi-link EML capability existence field, an MLD capability and operation existence field, and/or a roaming information existence field, wherein: the MLD MAC address existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an MLD MAC address field; the EML capability existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an EML capability field; the MLD capability and operation existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has an MLD capability and operation field; the roaming information existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field or link information field of the reconfigured multi-link element has a roaming information field.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述重配置多链路元素的通用信息字段包括MLD MAC地址字段、EML能力字段、MLD能力和操作字段、和漫游信息字段,其中:所述MLD MAC地址字段用于指示所述AP MLD 2的MLD MAC地址;所述EML能力字段用于指示所述non-AP MLD的增强多链路信息;所述MLD能力和操作字段用于指示所述non-AP MLD的多链路能力信息和操作参数;所述漫游信息字段用于指示以下信息中的一个或多个:信道信息、资源调度信息、功率信息、最大发送/接收空间流数目、增强型分布式信道接入EDCA参数集、应急准备通信服务EPCS信息、缓存状态报告BSR信息、序号编号SN、数据包编号PN、块确认BA会话信息、多接入点AP模式、电量信息、目标唤醒时间TWT信息、限定目标唤醒时间服务阶段R-TWT SP信息、业务标识符到链路 TID-to-Link的映射、扩展能力信息、和极高吞吐量EHT能力信息。In some embodiments of the present application, the general information field of the reconfigured multi-link element includes an MLD MAC address field, an EML capability field, an MLD capability and operation field, and a roaming information field, wherein: the MLD MAC address field is used to indicate the MLD MAC address of the AP MLD 2; the EML capability field is used to indicate the enhanced multi-link information of the non-AP MLD; the MLD capability and operation field is used to indicate the multi-link capability information and operation parameters of the non-AP MLD; the roaming information field is used to indicate one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set, emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information, buffer status report BSR information, sequence number SN, data packet number PN, block acknowledgment BA session information, multi-access point AP mode, power information, target wake-up time TWT information, target wake-up time service phase R-TWT SP information, service identifier to link TID-to-Link mapping, extended capability information, and extremely high throughput EHT capability information.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述信道信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的信道信息和/或所述non-AP MLD建立的链路对应的信道信息;所述资源调度信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的资源单元RU信息;所述功率信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的发送功率信息;所述最大发送/接收空间流数目用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的最大发送/接收空间流数目;所述增强型分布式信道接入EDCA参数集用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的EDCA参数集或用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的EDCA参数集;所述应急准备通信服务EPCS信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的EPCS能力信息、EPCS订阅信息和EPCS开启状态信息,和/或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2建立EPCS优先接入许可以及EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集;所述缓存状态报告BSR信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的缓存状态信息;所述序号编号SN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间的帧的SN;所述数据包编号PN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间已经发送完成的PN,或即将要发送的PN,或未发送的PN;所述块确认BA会话信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的块确认会话信息;所述多接入点AP模式用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的多AP协作模式;所述电量信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的休眠策略信息和/或所支持的休眠机制;所述目标唤醒时间TWT信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TWT信息;所述限定目标唤醒时间服务阶段R-TWT SP信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的R-TWT SP信息;所述业务标识符到链路TID-to-Link的映射用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TID-to-Link的映射方案,或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2之间建立的链路的TID-to-Link的映射方案;所述扩展能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的扩展能力信息;所述极高吞吐量EHT能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的EHT能力信息。In some embodiments of the present application, the channel information is used to indicate the channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or the channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD; the resource scheduling information is used to indicate the resource unit RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the power information is used to indicate the transmission power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD; the enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD. The EDCA parameter set may be used to indicate the EDCA parameter set established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information may be used to indicate the EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or may be used to indicate the EDCA parameter set that the non-AP MLD requests to establish an EPCS priority access permission and EPCS priority access with the AP MLD 2; the buffer status report BSR information may be used to indicate the buffer status information of the non-AP MLD; the sequence number SN may be used to indicate the SN of the frame between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; The data packet number PN is used to indicate the PN that has been sent between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or the PN that is about to be sent, or the PN that has not been sent; the block acknowledgment BA session information is used to indicate the block acknowledgment session information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the multi-access point AP mode is used to indicate the multi-AP collaboration mode supported by the non-AP MLD; the power information is used to indicate the sleep policy information and/or the supported sleep mechanism of the non-AP MLD; the target wake-up time TWT information is used to indicate the TWT information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the limited target wake-up time The service phase R-TWT SP information is used to indicate the R-TWT SP information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the service identifier to link TID-to-Link mapping is used to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or used to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme of the link established between the non-AP MLD request and the AP MLD 2; the extended capability information is used to indicate the extended capability information of the non-AP MLD; the extremely high throughput EHT capability information is used to indicate the EHT capability information of the non-AP MLD.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述重配置多链路元素包括每站点概述子元素用于携带发起漫游的所述non-AP MLD的概述信息。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述每站点概述子元素包括STA控制字段,所述STA控制字段包括链路标识符ID字段、重配置操作类型字段、新链路ID存在字段、和/或漫游信息存在字段,其中:所述链路ID字段用于指示链路ID;所述新链路ID存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的STA信息字段是否存在新链路ID信息字段;所述漫游信息存在字段用于指示所述重配置多链路元素的链路信息字段是否存在漫游信息字段。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述重配置操作类型字段指示的值为5时,所述重配置操作类型字段设置为切换链路的意义/操作。In some embodiments of the present application, the reconfiguration multilink element includes a per-site summary sub-element for carrying summary information of the non-AP MLD that initiated roaming. In some embodiments of the present application, the per-site summary sub-element includes a STA control field, and the STA control field includes a link identifier ID field, a reconfiguration operation type field, a new link ID presence field, and/or a roaming information presence field, wherein: the link ID field is used to indicate the link ID; the new link ID presence field is used to indicate whether a new link ID information field exists in the STA information field of the reconfiguration multilink element; and the roaming information presence field is used to indicate whether a roaming information field exists in the link information field of the reconfiguration multilink element. In some embodiments of the present application, when the value indicated by the reconfiguration operation type field is 5, the reconfiguration operation type field is set to the meaning/operation of switching links.
在本申请的一些实施例中,当所述重配置操作类型字段指示为切换链路字段和/或所述STA控制字段的新链路ID存在字段指示为存在时,所述STA控制字段中的链路ID字段指示为所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1断开的链路ID,所述新链路ID信息字段指示为所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间建立连接的链路ID。在本申请的一些实施例中,当所述重配置操作类型字段指示为切换链路字段和/或所述STA控制字段的新链路ID存在字段指示为存在时,所述STA控制字段中的链路ID字段指示为所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间建立连接的链路ID,所述新链路ID信息字段指示为所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1断开的链路ID。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述新链路ID信息字段包括链路ID字段,所述链路ID字段用于指示链路的标识符,其中,所述新链路ID信息字段还包括链路ID扩展字段,所述链路ID字段和所述链路ID扩展字段联合指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间建立的新链路ID。In some embodiments of the present application, when the reconfiguration operation type field indicates the switch link field and/or the new link ID existence field of the STA control field indicates existence, the link ID field in the STA control field indicates the link ID of the link between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1 being disconnected, and the new link ID information field indicates the link ID of the link established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2. In some embodiments of the present application, when the reconfiguration operation type field indicates the switch link field and/or the new link ID existence field of the STA control field indicates existence, the link ID field in the STA control field indicates the link ID of the link established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2, and the new link ID information field indicates the link ID of the link disconnected between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1. In some embodiments of the present application, the new link ID information field includes a link ID field, which is used to indicate an identifier of the link, wherein the new link ID information field also includes a link ID extension field, and the link ID field and the link ID extension field jointly indicate a new link ID established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二链路重配置帧包括重配置状态列表字段。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述重配置状态列表字段包括一个或多个重配置状态双重子字段,所述重配置状态双重子字段包括链路ID信息字段和状态字段。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述链路ID信息字段包括链路ID子字段,所述链路ID子字段指示AP的链路ID,在所述第一链路重配置帧中指示添加或删除所述AP的所述链路ID。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述状态字段包括第一状态码、第二状态码、第三状态码、第四状态码、和/或第五状态码,其中,第一状态码用于指示漫游请求被拒绝,因为所 述AP MLD 2的BSS负载大于第一设定值,第二状态码用于指示漫游请求被拒绝,因为建立链路的信道负载大于第二设定值,第三状态码用于指示漫游请求被拒绝,因为请求建立链路的时间与所述AP MLD 2允许建立链路的窗口不匹配,第四状态码用于指示将进入休眠状态,暂不接受漫游请求,第五状态码用于指示漫游请求被拒绝,因为所述AP MLD 2已达最大支持的STA/non-AP MLD的数量。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二链路重配置帧还包括基本多链路元素,所述基本多链路元素的存在比特映像地图字段包括漫游信息存在字段,其中,所述漫游信息存在字段用于指示所述基本多链路元素的通用信息字段或链路信息字段是否存在漫游信息字段。In some embodiments of the present application, the second link reconfiguration frame includes a reconfiguration status list field. In some embodiments of the present application, the reconfiguration status list field includes one or more reconfiguration status dual subfields, and the reconfiguration status dual subfield includes a link ID information field and a status field. In some embodiments of the present application, the link ID information field includes a link ID subfield, and the link ID subfield indicates the link ID of the AP, and indicates the addition or deletion of the link ID of the AP in the first link reconfiguration frame. In some embodiments of the present application, the status field includes a first status code, a second status code, a third status code, a fourth status code, and/or a fifth status code, wherein the first status code is used to indicate that the roaming request is rejected because the The BSS load of the AP MLD 2 is greater than a first set value, the second status code is used to indicate that the roaming request is rejected because the channel load for establishing the link is greater than the second set value, the third status code is used to indicate that the roaming request is rejected because the time for requesting to establish the link does not match the window allowed for link establishment by the AP MLD 2, the fourth status code is used to indicate that the AP will enter a dormant state and will not accept the roaming request for the time being, and the fifth status code is used to indicate that the roaming request is rejected because the AP MLD 2 has reached the maximum number of STAs/non-AP MLDs supported. In some embodiments of the present application, the second link reconfiguration frame further includes a basic multilink element, the presence bitmap field of the basic multilink element includes a roaming information presence field, wherein the roaming information presence field is used to indicate whether a roaming information field exists in the general information field or the link information field of the basic multilink element.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述基本多链路元素的所述通用信息字段包括MLD MAC地址字段,用于指示所述AP MLD 2的MLD MAC地址。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述基本多链路元素的所述通用信息字段还包括链路ID信息字段、BSS参数更改计数字段、媒介同步延迟信息字段、EML能力字段、MLD能力和操作字段、AP MLD ID字段、和/或扩展MLD能力和操作字段,所述链路ID信息字段、所述BSS参数更改计数字段、所述媒介同步延迟信息字段、所述EML能力字段、所述MLD能力和操作字段、所述AP MLD ID字段、和/或所述扩展MLD能力和操作字段指示的内容是指所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间的相关信息。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述漫游信息字段用于指示以下信息中的一个或多个:信道信息、资源调度信息、功率信息、最大发送/接收空间流数目、EDCA参数集、EPCS信息、BSR信息、SN、PN、BA会话信息、多AP模式、电量信息、TWT信息、R-TWT SP信息、TID-to-Link的映射、扩展能力信息、和EHT能力信息,其中:所述信道信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的信道信息和/或所述non-AP MLD建立的链路对应的信道信息;所述资源调度信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的RU信息;所述功率信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的发送功率信息;所述最大发送/接收空间流数目用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的最大发送/接收空间流数目;所述EDCA参数集用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的EDCA参数集或用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的EDCA参数集;所述EPCS信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的EPCS能力信息、EPCS订阅信息和EPCS开启状态信息,和/或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2建立EPCS优先接入许可以及EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集;所述BSR信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的缓存状态信息;所述SN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间的帧的SN;所述PN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间已经发送完成的PN,或即将要发送的PN,或未发送的PN;所述BA会话信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的块确认会话信息;所述多AP模式用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的多AP协作模式;所述电量信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的休眠策略信息和/或所支持的休眠机制;所述TWT信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TWT信息;所述R-TWT SP信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的R-TWT SP信息;所述TID-to-Link的映射用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TID-to-Link的映射方案,或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2之间建立的链路的TID-to-Link的映射方案;所述扩展能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的扩展能力信息;所述EHT能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的EHT能力信息。In some embodiments of the present application, the general information field of the basic multi-link element includes an MLD MAC address field, which is used to indicate the MLD MAC address of the AP MLD 2. In some embodiments of the present application, the general information field of the basic multi-link element also includes a link ID information field, a BSS parameter change count field, a media synchronization delay information field, an EML capability field, an MLD capability and operation field, an AP MLD ID field, and/or an extended MLD capability and operation field, and the contents indicated by the link ID information field, the BSS parameter change count field, the media synchronization delay information field, the EML capability field, the MLD capability and operation field, the AP MLD ID field, and/or the extended MLD capability and operation field refer to related information between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2. In some embodiments of the present application, the roaming information field is used to indicate one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, EDCA parameter set, EPCS information, BSR information, SN, PN, BA session information, multi-AP mode, power information, TWT information, R-TWT SP information, TID-to-Link mapping, extended capability information, and EHT capability information, wherein: the channel information is used to indicate the channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or the channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD; the resource scheduling information is used to indicate the RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the power information Used to indicate the transmit power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD; the EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD or to indicate the EDCA parameter set established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the EPCS information is used to indicate the EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or to indicate that the non-AP MLD requests to establish EPCS priority access permission and EPCS priority access with the AP MLD 2 EDCA parameter set; the BSR information is used to indicate the cache status information of the non-AP MLD; the SN is used to indicate the SN of the frame between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the PN is used to indicate the PN that has been sent, the PN that is about to be sent, or the PN that has not been sent between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the BA session information is used to indicate the block confirmation session information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the multi-AP mode is used to indicate the multi-AP cooperation mode supported by the non-AP MLD; the power information is used to indicate the sleep policy information and/or the supported sleep mechanism of the non-AP MLD; the TWT information is used to indicate The TWT information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the R-TWT SP information is used to indicate the R-TWT SP information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the TID-to-Link mapping is used to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme of the link established between the non-AP MLD request and the AP MLD 2; the extended capability information is used to indicate the extended capability information of the non-AP MLD; the EHT capability information is used to indicate the EHT capability information of the non-AP MLD.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述基本多链路元素的链路信息字段包括每站点概述子元素,所述每站点概述子元素包括STA控制字段,所述STA控制字段包括漫游信息存在字段。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述漫游信息存在字段用于指示所述基本多链路元素的链路信息字段是否存在漫游信息字段。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述的通信方法还包括所述AP MLD 2启动定时器,以确认所述AP MLD 2发送所述第一链路重配置帧和所述AP MLD 2接收所述第二链路重配置帧之间的时间间隔。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述AP MLD 2发送所述第一链路重配置帧后,启动所述定时器,如果所述AP MLD 2在所述定时器对应的时间内,接收所述第二链路重配置帧,则所述AP MLD 2通过所述第二链路重配置帧判断是否进行漫游。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述AP MLD 2发送所述第一链路重配置帧后,启动所述定时器,如果所述AP MLD 2在所述定时器对应的时间内,未接 收所述第二链路重配置帧,则所述AP MLD 2判断漫游失败。In some embodiments of the present application, the link information field of the basic multilink element includes a per-site summary sub-element, the per-site summary sub-element includes an STA control field, and the STA control field includes a roaming information presence field. In some embodiments of the present application, the roaming information presence field is used to indicate whether a roaming information field exists in the link information field of the basic multilink element. In some embodiments of the present application, the communication method further includes the AP MLD 2 starting a timer to confirm the time interval between the AP MLD 2 sending the first link reconfiguration frame and the AP MLD 2 receiving the second link reconfiguration frame. In some embodiments of the present application, after the AP MLD 2 sends the first link reconfiguration frame, the timer is started. If the AP MLD 2 receives the second link reconfiguration frame within the time corresponding to the timer, the AP MLD 2 determines whether to roam based on the second link reconfiguration frame. In some embodiments of the present application, after the AP MLD 2 sends the first link reconfiguration frame, the timer is started. If the AP MLD 2 does not receive the second link reconfiguration frame within the time corresponding to the timer, the AP MLD 2 determines whether to roam. Upon receiving the second link reconfiguration frame, the AP MLD 2 determines that roaming fails.
实施例4:目标AP MLD发起漫游的方法:Example 4: Method for target AP MLD to initiate roaming:
如图4B所示,(目标)AP MLD 2主动给non-AP MLD发起漫游的情况下,说明non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1之间的链路质量不佳,或者(目标)AP MLD 2测量(即图中的请求帧1和/或响应帧1交互)获知non-AP MLD正在远离(当前)AP MLD 1,靠近(目标)AP MLD 2。请求帧1和响应帧1具体所代表的帧见实施例1的设计。那么(目标)AP MLD 2在发起(non-AP MLD的)漫游时,或(目标)AP MLD 2在发起(non-AP MLD的)漫游前,先与(当前)AP MLD 1进行上下文迁移(详见本申请的一些实施例)。As shown in Figure 4B, when (target) AP MLD 2 proactively initiates roaming for the non-AP MLD, this indicates that the link quality between the non-AP MLD and the (current) AP MLD 1 is poor, or that (target) AP MLD 2 measures (i.e., the interaction of request frame 1 and/or response frame 1 in the figure) and learns that the non-AP MLD is moving away from the (current) AP MLD 1 and closer to the (target) AP MLD 2. The specific frames represented by request frame 1 and response frame 1 are shown in the design of Example 1. Therefore, when (target) AP MLD 2 initiates roaming (for the non-AP MLD), or before initiating roaming (for the non-AP MLD), it first performs context migration with the (current) AP MLD 1 (see some embodiments of this application for details).
(目标)AP MLD 2给non-AP MLD发起漫游的方式有以下3种:There are three ways for (target) AP MLD 2 to initiate roaming to a non-AP MLD:
方式1:(目标)AP MLD 2请求与non-AP MLD进行切换链路:Method 1: (Target) AP MLD 2 requests to switch links with non-AP MLD:
在方式1下,(目标)AP MLD 2在即将要建立的link 2’上发送的链路重配置请求帧格式与实施例1中的链路重配置请求帧格式一致,其中重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的STA控制field中的重配置操作类型设置为(次序)5,即切换链路的类型,那么STA控制字段的新链路ID存在需要设置为1,也就意味着重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的STA信息字段(见图2G)中存在新链路ID信息(具体格式如图2H)。此时重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的STA控制字段中的链路ID字段指示的是需要与(当前)AP MLD 1断开的链路的链路ID,重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的STA信息字段的新链路ID信息字段(具体格式如图2H)指示的是需要与(目标)AP MLD 2之间建立的链路的Link ID。其余字段与前面设计类似,不再赘述。In mode 1, the link reconfiguration request frame format sent by (target) AP MLD 2 on link 2' to be established is consistent with the link reconfiguration request frame format in Example 1. The reconfiguration operation type in the STA Control field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element is set to (order) 5, indicating the link switching type. Therefore, the New Link ID field in the STA Control field must be set to 1, which means that the STA Information field (see FIG. 2G ) of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element contains new link ID information (the specific format is shown in FIG. 2H ). At this time, the Link ID field in the STA Control field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element indicates the link ID of the link to be disconnected from (current) AP MLD 1, and the New Link ID field (the specific format is shown in FIG. 2H ) in the STA Information field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element indicates the link ID of the link to be established with (target) AP MLD 2. The remaining fields are similar to the previous design and will not be repeated here.
然后non-AP MLD在收到链路重配置请求帧的链路(link)上回复链路重配置响应帧给(目标)AP MLD 2,该帧的字段与前面设计类似,不再赘述。The non-AP MLD then replies with a link reconfiguration response frame to the (target) AP MLD 2 on the link where the link reconfiguration request frame was received. The fields of this frame are similar to the previous design and will not be repeated here.
方式2:(目标)AP MLD 2请求与non-AP MLD进行添加链路(add link),然后non-AP MLD请求与(当前)AP MLD 1进行删除链路(delete link):Method 2: (Target) AP MLD 2 requests to add a link (add link) with non-AP MLD, and then non-AP MLD requests to delete a link (delete link) with (current) AP MLD 1:
在方式2下,(目标)AP MLD 2在即将要建立的link 2’上给non-AP MLD发送的和non-AP MLD在link1上给(当前)AP MLD 1发送的链路重配置请求帧的格式可以为IEEE 802.11be标准中的链路重配置请求帧格式,也可以为实施例1中的链路重配置请求帧格式。该方式下的具体操作如下:In mode 2, the link reconfiguration request frame format sent by (target) AP MLD 2 to the non-AP MLD on link 2' to be established, and the link reconfiguration request frame format sent by the non-AP MLD to the (current) AP MLD 1 on link 1, can be in the link reconfiguration request frame format specified in the IEEE 802.11be standard or in the link reconfiguration request frame format specified in Example 1. The specific operations in this mode are as follows:
首先,(目标)AP MLD 2在即将要建立的link 2’上给non-AP MLD发送链路重配置请求帧,其中重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的STA控制字段中的重配置操作类型(Reconfiguration Operation Type)设置为(次序)2,即添加链路(Add Link)的类型,那么STA控制字段的链路ID字段设置为(目标)AP MLD 2请求与non-AP MLD建立新链路的标识符;non-AP MLD在收到链路重配置请求帧的链路上回复链路重配置响应帧给(目标)AP MLD 2指示是否接受新建立的链路及其它信息。First, (target) AP MLD 2 sends a link reconfiguration request frame to the non-AP MLD on the link 2’ to be established, in which the reconfiguration operation type (Reconfiguration Operation Type) in the STA control field of the reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element) is set to (order) 2, that is, the type of adding a link (Add Link). Then the link ID field of the STA control field is set to the identifier of the new link requested by (target) AP MLD 2 to establish a new link with the non-AP MLD; the non-AP MLD replies with a link reconfiguration response frame to the (target) AP MLD 2 on the link on which it receives the link reconfiguration request frame, indicating whether it accepts the newly established link and other information.
然后,non-AP MLD在link 1上给(当前)AP MLD 1发送链路重配置请求帧,其中重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的STA控制字段中的重配置操作类型(Reconfiguration Operation Type)设置为(次序)3,即删除链路(Delete Link)的类型,那么STA控制字段的链路ID字段设置为non-AP MLD请求与(当前)AP MLD 1删除的链路的标识符;(当前)AP MLD 1在收到链路重配置请求帧的链路上回复链路重配置响应帧给non-AP MLD指示链路删除的结果及其它信息。Then, the non-AP MLD sends a Link Reconfiguration Request frame to the (current) AP MLD 1 on link 1, in which the Reconfiguration Operation Type in the STA Control field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element is set to (order) 3, that is, the type of Delete Link. Then, the Link ID field of the STA Control field is set to the identifier of the link that the non-AP MLD requests to be deleted by the (current) AP MLD 1; the (current) AP MLD 1 replies with a Link Reconfiguration Response frame to the non-AP MLD on the link on which it received the Link Reconfiguration Request frame, indicating the result of the link deletion and other information.
链路重配置请求帧和链路重配置响应帧其余字段与前面设计类似,不再赘述。The remaining fields of the link reconfiguration request frame and the link reconfiguration response frame are similar to the previous design and will not be repeated here.
方式3:(目标)AP MLD 2请求与non-AP MLD进行添加链路(add link),然后(当前)AP MLD 1请求与non-AP MLD进行删除链路(delete link):在此情况下,AP MLD 1与AP MLD 2之间可在上下文迁移操作中建立回程连接,因此AP MLD 1可以获知AP MLD 2和Non-AP MLD在进行漫游请求,从而提出删除链路请求。Method 3: (Target) AP MLD 2 requests to add a link with non-AP MLD, and then (current) AP MLD 1 requests to delete a link with non-AP MLD: In this case, a backhaul connection can be established between AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2 during the context migration operation, so AP MLD 1 can know that AP MLD 2 and Non-AP MLD are making roaming requests, and thus make a request to delete the link.
在方式3下,(目标)AP MLD 2与non-AP MLD之间的链路重配置请求帧和链路重配置响应帧交互,以及产生的作用都与上述实施利中的方式2一致,不再赘述,不同之处在于方式3是(当前)AP MLD 1主动请求断开与non-AP MLD的link。具体如下:In mode 3, the exchange of link reconfiguration request frames and link reconfiguration response frames between (target) AP MLD 2 and non-AP MLD, as well as the resulting effects, are consistent with those in mode 2 in the above implementation and will not be described in detail. The difference is that mode 3 is (current) AP MLD 1 proactively requests to disconnect the link with the non-AP MLD. The details are as follows:
(当前)AP MLD 1给non-AP MLD发送链路重配置请求帧,其中重配置多链路元素(Reconfiguration Multi-Link element)的STA控制字段中的重配置操作类型(Reconfiguration Operation Type)设置为(次序)3,即删除链路(Delete Link)的类型,那么STA控制字段的链路ID字段设置为(当前)AP MLD 1请求与non-AP MLD删除的链路的标识符;non-AP MLD回复链路重配置响应帧给(当前)AP MLD 1指示链路删除的结果及其它信息。(Current) AP MLD 1 sends a Link Reconfiguration Request frame to the non-AP MLD, in which the Reconfiguration Operation Type in the STA Control field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element is set to (Sequence) 3, that is, the type of Delete Link. Then the Link ID field of the STA Control field is set to the identifier of the link that (Current) AP MLD 1 requests the non-AP MLD to delete. The non-AP MLD replies with a Link Reconfiguration Response frame to the (Current) AP MLD 1 to indicate the result of the link deletion and other information.
链路重配置请求帧和链路重配置响应帧其余字段与前面设计类似,不再赘述。The remaining fields of the link reconfiguration request frame and the link reconfiguration response frame are similar to the previous design and will not be repeated here.
实施例4的好处:由目标AP MLD向non-AP MLD发起(漫游)AP MLD的切换。目标AP MLD可以在发起漫游的请求帧中直接携带上即将生产的配置/参数等,完成新链路建立的过程中就可以完成通信相关参数的配置,节省了漫游的时间。Benefit of Example 4: The target AP MLD initiates a (roaming) AP MLD handover to the non-AP MLD. The target AP MLD can directly carry the configuration/parameters to be generated in the roaming request frame. Communication-related parameters can be configured during the new link establishment process, saving roaming time.
链路重配置请求帧和链路重配置响应帧之间的定时器(Timer)设计:Timer design between link reconfiguration request frame and link reconfiguration response frame:
实施例1~实施例4设计了基于链路重配置请求帧和链路重配置响应帧的漫游方法,为了防止漫游执行过程过长而影响non-AP MLD和/或(当前)AP MLD 1和/或(目标)AP MLD 2的正常通信,本申请实施例提出设计一个漫游定时器,该定时器用于约束发送方发送完链路重配置请求帧后,响应方发送链路重配置响应帧的时间间隔。例如,发送方发送链路重配置请求帧后,立即启动漫游Timer的倒计时,如果在漫游定时器对应的时间内收到了响应方发送的链路重配置响应帧,则按照该链路重配置响应帧的指示来判断是否完成漫游(或链路切换),如果在漫游定时器对应的时间内未收到响应方发送的链路重配置响应帧,则发送方认为漫游(或链路切换)失败,如需继续进行漫游操作,则可以等待后重试或寻找其它目标)AP MLD进行漫游。Embodiments 1 to 4 design a roaming method based on a link reconfiguration request frame and a link reconfiguration response frame. In order to prevent the roaming execution process from being too long and affecting the normal communication of the non-AP MLD and/or (current) AP MLD 1 and/or (target) AP MLD 2, the embodiments of the present application propose to design a roaming timer. The timer is used to constrain the time interval between the sender sending the link reconfiguration request frame and the responder sending the link reconfiguration response frame. For example, after the sender sends the link reconfiguration request frame, the countdown of the roaming timer is immediately started. If the link reconfiguration response frame sent by the responder is received within the time corresponding to the roaming timer, the sender determines whether the roaming (or link switching) is completed according to the instructions of the link reconfiguration response frame. If the link reconfiguration response frame sent by the responder is not received within the time corresponding to the roaming timer, the sender considers that the roaming (or link switching) has failed. If the roaming operation needs to be continued, the sender can wait and try again or find another target) AP MLD to roam.
图5A为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的上下文迁移方法的通信方法的流程示意图。如图5A所示,所述基于多链路设备漫游的上下文迁移方法,执行于接入点多链路设备AP MLD,其中,所述上下文迁移方法包括以下至少一个操作:操作501A:第一接入点多链路设备AP MLD 1与第二接入点多链路设备AP MLD 2建立回程链路;操作502A:所述AP MLD 1通过所述回程链路与所述AP MLD 2交互上下文迁移信息。FIG5A is a flow chart illustrating a communication method for a context migration method based on multi-link device roaming provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG5A , the context migration method based on multi-link device roaming is executed on an access point multi-link device (AP MLD). The context migration method includes at least one of the following operations: Operation 501A: A first access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 1 establishes a backhaul link with a second access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 2; Operation 502A: AP MLD 1 exchanges context migration information with AP MLD 2 via the backhaul link.
通过上述技术方案,所述AP MLD 1通过所述回程链路与所述AP MLD 2交互上下文迁移信息,从而改善所述non-AP MLD漫游所述AP MLD 2时的体验,做到基本无中断的漫游,还能让AP MLD 2提前为所述non-AP MLD预留资料和进行通信的配置,进一步降低了漫游的时延。Through the above technical solution, the AP MLD 1 exchanges context migration information with the AP MLD 2 through the backhaul link, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming on the AP MLD 2, achieving basically uninterrupted roaming, and allowing AP MLD 2 to reserve data and configure communications for the non-AP MLD in advance, further reducing roaming latency.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述回程链路是无线回程链路。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述上下文迁移信息包括第一帧和第二帧,所述第一帧用于传递在所述AP MLD 1和所述AP MLD 2之间漫游的非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD的信息,所述第二帧对接受所述第一帧做确认、所述第二帧对所述第一帧所携带的信息做修改或建议、和/或所述第二帧携带所述第一帧所请求的信息。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述上下文迁移信息包括第一帧和应答帧,所述第一帧是行动帧,所述行动帧用于传递在所述AP MLD 1和所述AP MLD 2之间漫游的非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD的信息,所述应答帧对接受所述第一帧做应答。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述上下文迁移信息包括第一帧,所述第一帧是行动帧,所述行动帧用于传递在所述AP MLD 1和所述AP MLD 2之间漫游的非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD的信息,接收方不需要对所述行动帧的接收进行确认。In some embodiments of the present application, the backhaul link is a wireless backhaul link. In some embodiments of the present application, the context migration information includes a first frame and a second frame, the first frame being used to convey information about a non-AP MLD roaming between AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2, and the second frame confirming the receipt of the first frame, modifying or suggesting information carried by the first frame, and/or carrying information requested by the first frame. In some embodiments of the present application, the context migration information includes a first frame and a response frame, the first frame being an action frame being used to convey information about a non-AP MLD roaming between AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2, and the response frame being used to respond to the receipt of the first frame. In some embodiments of the present application, the context migration information includes a first frame, the first frame being an action frame being used to convey information about a non-AP MLD roaming between AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2, and the receiver does not need to confirm receipt of the action frame.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一帧用于指示以下信息中的一个或多个:信道信息、资源调度信息、功率信息、最大发送/接收空间流数目、增强型分布式信道接入EDCA参数集、应急准备通信服务EPCS信息、缓存状态报告BSR信息、序号编号SN、数据包编号PN、块确认BA会话信息、多接入点AP模式、电量信息、目标唤醒时间TWT信息、限定目标唤醒时间服务阶段R-TWT SP信息、业务标识符到链路TID-to-Link的映射、扩展能力信息、极高吞吐量EHT能力信息、增强多链路EML能力信息、MLD能力和操作信息、新链路ID、和待传输的数据。In some embodiments of the present application, the first frame is used to indicate one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set, emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information, buffer status report BSR information, sequence number SN, data packet number PN, block acknowledgment BA session information, multi-access point AP mode, power information, target wake-up time TWT information, limited target wake-up time service phase R-TWT SP information, service identifier to link TID-to-Link mapping, extended capability information, extremely high throughput EHT capability information, enhanced multi-link EML capability information, MLD capability and operation information, new link ID, and data to be transmitted.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述信道信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的信道信息和/或所述non-AP MLD建立的链路对应的信道信息;所述资源调度信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的资源单元RU信息;所述功率信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的发送功率信息;所述最大发送/接收空间流数目用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的最大发送/接收空间流数目;所述EDCA参数集用于指示所述non-AP MLD所 支持的EDCA参数集或用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的EDCA参数集;所述EPCS信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的EPCS能力信息、EPCS订阅信息和EPCS开启状态信息,和/或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2建立EPCS优先接入许可以及EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集;所述BSR信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的缓存状态信息;所述SN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间的帧的SN;所述PN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间已经发送完成的PN,或即将要发送的PN,或未发送的PN;所述BA会话信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的块确认会话信息;所述多AP模式用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的多AP协作模式;所述电量信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的休眠策略信息和/或所支持的休眠机制;所述TWT信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TWT信息;所述R-TWT SP信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的R-TWT SP信息;所述TID-to-Link的映射用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TID-to-Link的映射方案,或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2之间建立的链路的TID-to-Link的映射方案;所述扩展能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的扩展能力信息;所述EHT能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的EHT能力信息;所述EML能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的EML能力信息;所述MLD能力和操作信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的MLD能力和操作信息;所述新链路ID指示为所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间建立连接的链路ID;所述待传输的数据用于指示所述AP MLD 1向即将要进行漫游的所述non-AP MLD下行缓存的未发送的数据。In some embodiments of the present application, the channel information is used to indicate the channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or the channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD; the resource scheduling information is used to indicate the resource unit RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the power information is used to indicate the transmit power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD; and the EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD. The EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD or the EDCA parameter set established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the EPCS information is used to indicate the EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or is used to indicate the EDCA parameter set for the non-AP MLD to request the non-AP MLD to establish an EPCS priority access permission and EPCS priority access with the AP MLD 2; the BSR information is used to indicate the cache status information of the non-AP MLD; the SN is used to indicate the SN of the frame between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the PN is used to indicate the PN that has been sent, the PN to be sent, or the PN that has not been sent between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the BA session information is used to indicate the block confirmation session information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the multi-AP mode is used to indicate the multi-AP collaboration mode supported by the non-AP MLD; the power information is used to indicate the non-AP MLD sleep policy information and/or supported sleep mechanisms; the TWT information is used to indicate the TWT information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the R-TWT SP information is used to indicate the R-TWT SP information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the TID-to-Link mapping is used to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme of the link established between the non-AP MLD request and the AP MLD 2; the extended capability information is used to indicate the extended capability information of the non-AP MLD; the EHT capability information is used to indicate the EHT capability information of the non-AP MLD; the EML capability information is used to indicate the EML capability information of the non-AP MLD; the MLD capability and operation information is used to indicate the MLD capability and operation information of the non-AP MLD; the new link ID is indicated as the link between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2 to establish a link ID of the connection; the data to be transmitted is used to indicate the unsent data in the downlink buffer of the AP MLD 1 to the non-AP MLD that is about to roam.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述回程链路是有线回程链路。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述上下文迁移信息包括以下信息中的一个或多个:信道信息、资源调度信息、功率信息、最大发送/接收空间流数目、增强型分布式信道接入EDCA参数集、应急准备通信服务EPCS信息、缓存状态报告BSR信息、序号编号SN、数据包编号PN、块确认BA会话信息、多接入点AP模式、电量信息、目标唤醒时间TWT信息、限定目标唤醒时间服务阶段R-TWT SP信息、业务标识符到链路TID-to-Link的映射、扩展能力信息、极高吞吐量EHT能力信息、增强多链路EML能力信息、MLD能力和操作信息、新链路ID、和待定待传输的数据。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述信道信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的信道信息和/或所述non-AP MLD建立的链路对应的信道信息;所述资源调度信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的资源单元RU信息;所述功率信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的发送功率信息;所述最大发送/接收空间流数目用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的最大发送/接收空间流数目;所述EDCA参数集用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的EDCA参数集或用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的EDCA参数集;所述EPCS信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的EPCS能力信息、EPCS订阅信息和EPCS开启状态信息,和/或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2建立EPCS优先接入许可以及EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集;所述BSR信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的缓存状态信息;所述SN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间的帧的SN;所述PN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间已经发送完成的PN,或即将要发送的PN,或未发送的PN;所述BA会话信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的块确认会话信息;所述多AP模式用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的多AP协作模式;所述电量信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的休眠策略信息和/或所支持的休眠机制;所述TWT信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TWT信息;所述R-TWT SP信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的R-TWT SP信息;所述TID-to-Link的映射用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TID-to-Link的映射方案,或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2之间建立的链路的TID-to-Link的映射方案;所述扩展能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的扩展能力信息;所述EHT能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的EHT能力信息;所述EML能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的EML能力信息;所述MLD能力和操作信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的MLD能力和操作信息;所述新链路ID指示为所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间建立连接的链路ID;所述待传输的数据用于指示所述AP MLD 1向即将要进行漫游的所述non-AP MLD下行缓存的未发送的数据。In some embodiments of the present application, the backhaul link is a wired backhaul link. In some embodiments of the present application, the context migration information includes one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set, emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information, buffer status report BSR information, sequence number SN, data packet number PN, block acknowledgement BA session information, multiple access point AP mode, power information, target wake time TWT information, target wake time service phase R-TWT SP information, service identifier to link TID-to-Link mapping, extended capability information, extremely high throughput EHT capability information, enhanced multi-link EML capability information, MLD capability and operation information, new link ID, and pending data to be transmitted. In some embodiments of the present application, the channel information is used to indicate the channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or the channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD; the resource scheduling information is used to indicate the resource unit RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the power information is used to indicate the transmission power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD; the EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD or to indicate the number of transmit/receive spatial streams used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1. The EPCS information is used to indicate the EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or to indicate that the non-AP MLD requests to establish an EPCS priority access permission and an EDCA parameter set for EPCS priority access with the AP MLD 2; the BSR information is used to indicate the cache status information of the non-AP MLD; the SN is used to indicate the SN of the frame between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the PN is used to indicate the PN that has been sent, the PN that is about to be sent, or the PN that has not been sent between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the BA session information is used to indicate the PN of the non-AP MLD. The block confirmation session information established between the MLD and the AP MLD 1; the multi-AP mode is used to indicate the multi-AP cooperation mode supported by the non-AP MLD; the power information is used to indicate the sleep policy information and/or supported sleep mechanism of the non-AP MLD; the TWT information is used to indicate the TWT information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the R-TWT SP information is used to indicate the R-TWT SP information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the TID-to-Link mapping is used to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1. The MLD requests a TID-to-Link mapping scheme for the link established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2; the extended capability information is used to indicate the extended capability information of the non-AP MLD; the EHT capability information is used to indicate the EHT capability information of the non-AP MLD; the EML capability information is used to indicate the EML capability information of the non-AP MLD; the MLD capability and operation information is used to indicate the MLD capability and operation information of the non-AP MLD; the new link ID indicates the link ID for establishing a connection between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2; the data to be transmitted is used to indicate the unsent data that the AP MLD 1 downlink caches to the non-AP MLD that is about to roam.
当前AP MLD和目标AP MLD之间的上下文迁移设计:Context migration design between the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD:
上述的一些实施例所设计的各种方案都存在当前AP MLD和目标AP MLD之间进行上下文迁 移的步骤,值得注意的是上述的一些实施例的(图中的)上下文迁移步骤发生时刻不限于图中所列举的时刻,本申请实施例不作限定。此外,按照当前AP MLD和目标AP MLD之间回程链路(backhaul link)属于无线链路或有线链路,本申请实施例做了如下的设计。The various solutions designed in the above embodiments all involve context migration between the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD. It is worth noting that the context migration steps in some of the aforementioned embodiments (in the figures) are not limited to the times listed in the figures, and this is not a limitation in the present embodiment. Furthermore, depending on whether the backhaul link between the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD is a wireless link or a wired link, the present embodiment makes the following design.
实施例5:AP MLD之间采用无线回程:Example 5: Wireless backhaul between APs and MLDs:
当前AP MLD和目标AP MLD之间采用无线回程进行上下文迁移时,需要当前AP MLD和目标AP MLD之间先完成链路的建立(即完成Multi-Link Setup)。本实施利以(当前)AP MLD 1的附属AP 3与(目标)AP MLD 2的附属AP 3之间建立的链路作为回程链路(backhaul link)为例进行说明,但本申请不限于此,例如也可以是(当前)AP MLD 1的附属AP x(x小于等于AP MLD 1所支持的最大附属AP数目,在本例子中x等于1,2,3)与(目标)AP MLD 2的附属AP y(y小于等于AP MLD 2所支持的最大附属AP数目,在本例子中y等于1,2,3)之间建立的链路作为回程链路(backhaul link)。When wireless backhaul is used for context migration between the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD, a link must be established between the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD first (i.e., Multi-Link Setup is completed). This embodiment uses the link established between the subordinate AP 3 of (current) AP MLD 1 and the subordinate AP 3 of (target) AP MLD 2 as an example for description as the backhaul link, but the present application is not limited thereto. For example, the link established between the subordinate AP x of (current) AP MLD 1 (x is less than or equal to the maximum number of subordinate APs supported by AP MLD 1, in this example, x is equal to 1, 2, 3) and the subordinate AP y of (target) AP MLD 2 (y is less than or equal to the maximum number of subordinate APs supported by AP MLD 2, in this example, y is equal to 1, 2, 3) as the backhaul link.
此外,当前AP MLD和目标AP MLD之间用于进行上下文迁移的帧,按照类型分可以有以下3种实现方式。In addition, frames used for context migration between the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD can be implemented in the following three ways according to their types.
方式1:请求帧+响应帧Method 1: Request frame + response frame
图5B为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的上下文迁移方法的通信方法的流程示意图。如图5B所示,(当前)AP MLD 1向(目标)AP MLD 2发送一个请求帧2,请求将即将发起漫游的non-AP MLD的相关参数/信息传递给(目标)AP MLD 2。(目标)AP MLD 2在收到请求帧2后,间隔一定的时间(例如短帧间隔(SIFS)时长,本申请实施例不限于此,还可以是其它时长,例如优先帧间间隔(PIFS)等)回复响应帧2给(当前)AP MLD 1。其中响应帧2可以包含以下功能的一项或多项:FIG5B is a flow chart of a communication method for a context migration method based on multi-link device roaming provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG5B , (current) AP MLD 1 sends a request frame 2 to (target) AP MLD 2, requesting that the relevant parameters/information of the non-AP MLD that is about to initiate roaming be passed to (target) AP MLD 2. After receiving the request frame 2, (target) AP MLD 2 returns a response frame 2 to (current) AP MLD 1 after a certain interval (e.g., a short interframe space (SIFS) duration, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto and may also be other durations, such as a priority interframe space (PIFS), etc.). The response frame 2 may include one or more of the following functions:
1)仅对请求帧2所发送的信息做接收成功确认(即默认接受请求帧2所携带的信息)。1) Only confirm the successful reception of the information sent by request frame 2 (that is, accept the information carried by request frame 2 by default).
2)对请求帧2所发送的信息做出拒绝和/或给出建议(即可以对请求帧2所携带的信息做修改或建议更合适的信息)。额外携带(目标)AP MLD 2自身的参数/信息(即携带请求帧2所请求的信息等)。2) Reject and/or make suggestions for the information sent in Request Frame 2 (i.e., modify the information carried in Request Frame 2 or suggest more appropriate information). Also carry parameters/information of (target) AP MLD 2 (i.e., carry the information requested in Request Frame 2, etc.).
注:上述例子和图5B中以(当前)AP MLD 1向(目标)AP MLD 2发送一个请求帧2,(目标)AP MLD 2响应响应帧2为例,还可以是(目标)AP MLD 2向(当前)AP MLD 1发送一个请求帧2,(当前)AP MLD 1响应响应帧2。Note: In the above example and Figure 5B, (current) AP MLD 1 sends a request frame 2 to (target) AP MLD 2, and (target) AP MLD 2 responds with a response frame 2. It can also be that (target) AP MLD 2 sends a request frame 2 to (current) AP MLD 1, and (current) AP MLD 1 responds with a response frame 2.
方式2:行动帧(带应答(Ack)帧):Mode 2: Action frame (with ACK frame):
图5C为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的上下文迁移方法的通信方法的流程示意图。如图5C所示,在方式2中,请求帧2被设计为行动帧(Action frame)的类型(有帧控制字段进行指示),行动帧需要接收方进行应答(Ack)响应。如图5C所示,(当前)AP MLD 1向(目标)AP MLD 2发送一个请求帧2,请求将即将发起漫游的non-AP MLD的相关参数/信息传递给(目标)AP MLD 2。(目标)AP MLD 2在收到请求帧2后,间隔一定的时间(例如短帧间隔(SIFS)时长,本申请实施例不限于此,还可以是其它时长,例如优先帧间间隔(PIFS)等)回复应答帧(Ack frame)给(当前)AP MLD 1。其中应答帧(Ack frame)仅对请求帧2所发送的信息做接收成功确认(即默认接受请求帧2所携带的信息)。Figure 5C is a flow chart illustrating a communication method for context migration based on multi-link device roaming, as provided in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 5C , in Method 2, Request Frame 2 is designed as an Action Frame (indicated by the Frame Control field), which requires an acknowledgment (Ack) response from the recipient. As shown in Figure 5C , (current) AP MLD 1 sends a Request Frame 2 to (target) AP MLD 2, requesting that relevant parameters/information of the non-AP MLD that is about to initiate roaming be transferred to (target) AP MLD 2. After receiving Request Frame 2, (target) AP MLD 2 responds with an acknowledgment frame (Ack frame) to (current) AP MLD 1 after a predetermined interval (e.g., a Short Interframe Space (SIFS) duration, although this embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto and may also be other durations, such as a Priority Interframe Space (PIFS)). The acknowledgment frame (Ack frame) merely confirms the successful receipt of the information sent in Request Frame 2 (i.e., implicitly accepts the information carried in Request Frame 2).
方式3:行动帧不需应答(Action No Ack frame):Method 3: Action No Ack frame:
在方式3中,请求帧2被设计为行动帧不需应答(Action No Ack)的类型(有帧控制字段进行指示)。如图5D所示,(当前)AP MLD 1向(目标)AP MLD 2发送一个请求帧2,请求将即将发起漫游的non-AP MLD的相关参数/信息传递给(目标)AP MLD 2。发送方默认接收方成功接收并接受请求帧2所携带的信息。In Mode 3, Request Frame 2 is designed as an Action No Ack (indicated by the Frame Control field). As shown in Figure 5D, (current) AP MLD 1 sends Request Frame 2 to (target) AP MLD 2, requesting that the parameters/information of the non-AP MLD that is about to initiate roaming be transferred to (target) AP MLD 2. The sender assumes that the receiver has successfully received and accepted the information carried in Request Frame 2.
下面对上述3种方式中的请求帧2和响应帧2进行格式设计:The following is the format design of the request frame 2 and response frame 2 in the above three methods:
请求帧2格式设计:Request frame 2 format design:
用于上下文迁移的请求帧2可以包含上述的一些实施例中链路重配置请求帧所携带的部分信息或全部信息。例如请求帧2可以包含non-AP MLD以下信息的一种或多种:信道和带宽、RU分配、 功率限制、Max TX/RX Nss、EDCA参数集、EPCS信息、BSR相关信息、SN:序号编号(Sequence Number)、PN:数据包编号(Packet Number)、BA会话、多AP模式、电量相关信息、TWT元素、R-TWT相关信息、TID-to-Link映射、扩展能力元素、EHT能力元素、EML能力字段、MLD能力和操作、新链路ID、待传输的数据(Pending Data):当前AP MLD向即将要进行漫游的non-AP MLD下行缓存的未发送的数据。以上信息详细解释见a)链路重配置请求帧格式设计中描述,不再赘述,值得注意的是这里额外增加了待传输的数据。注:以上信息未详尽列举所有信息,理论上可以包含链路重配置请求帧所携带的全部信息。The request frame 2 for context migration may include some or all of the information carried by the link reconfiguration request frame in some of the above embodiments. For example, the request frame 2 may include one or more of the following information of non-AP MLD: channel and bandwidth, RU allocation, Power limit, Max TX/RX Nss, EDCA parameter set, EPCS information, BSR-related information, SN (Sequence Number), PN (Packet Number), BA session, multi-AP mode, power-related information, TWT element, R-TWT-related information, TID-to-Link mapping, extended capability element, EHT capability element, EML capability field, MLD capabilities and operations, new link ID, and pending data (Pending Data): unsent data buffered downlink by the current AP MLD to the non-AP MLD to which roaming is to begin. A detailed explanation of the above information is provided in a) Link Reconfiguration Request frame format design and will not be repeated here. Note that the pending data is also included here. Note: This is not an exhaustive list; theoretically, it should include all the information carried by the Link Reconfiguration Request frame.
a)响应帧2格式设计:a) Response frame 2 format design:
用于上下文迁移的响应帧2可以包含上述的一些实施例中链路重配置响应帧所携带的部分信息或全部信息,不再赘述,响应帧2可能需要对请求帧2所携带的信息进行转换(详见上述实施利),方便non-AP MLD切换到(目标)AP MLD 2之后进行后续数据传输/通信。The response frame 2 for context migration may include part or all of the information carried by the link reconfiguration response frame in some of the above-mentioned embodiments, which will not be repeated here. The response frame 2 may need to convert the information carried by the request frame 2 (see the above-mentioned embodiments for details) to facilitate subsequent data transmission/communication after the non-AP MLD switches to the (target) AP MLD 2.
b)请求帧2和响应帧2举例:b) Example of request frame 2 and response frame 2:
a)和b)中分别对请求帧2和响应帧2可以包含的内容进行了设计和举例,实际中请求帧2和响应帧2可以为IEEE 802.11标准中已经存在的FT请求帧和FT响应帧,那么上述请求帧2可以携带的信息/内容则由FT请求帧的帧本体(frame body)来承载,上述响应帧2可以携带的信息/内容则由FT响应帧的帧本体来承载,上述应答还可以由FT应答帧来替代。In a) and b), the contents that the request frame 2 and response frame 2 can contain are designed and given examples respectively. In practice, the request frame 2 and response frame 2 can be the FT request frame and FT response frame that already exist in the IEEE 802.11 standard. Then, the information/content that the request frame 2 can carry is carried by the frame body of the FT request frame, and the information/content that the response frame 2 can carry is carried by the frame body of the FT response frame. The above-mentioned response can also be replaced by the FT response frame.
值得注意的是,这里仅为一种可能性举例,本实施利的帧格式设计不局限于FT请求帧和FT响应帧。It should be noted that this is only a possible example, and the frame format design of this embodiment is not limited to the FT request frame and the FT response frame.
该实施例所能实现的效果:当前AP MLD和目标AP MLD之间进行信息的交换,不仅可以让non-AP MLD在保持State 4的情况下无缝连接上目标AP MLD,还能让目标AP MLD提前为该non-AP MLD预留资料和进行通信的配置,进一步降低了漫游的时延。Effects that can be achieved by this embodiment: The information exchange between the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD not only allows the non-AP MLD to seamlessly connect to the target AP MLD while maintaining State 4, but also allows the target AP MLD to reserve data and configure communications for the non-AP MLD in advance, further reducing roaming latency.
实施例6:AP MLD之间采用有线回程:Example 6: Using wired backhaul between APs and MLDs:
如果当前AP MLD和目标AP MLD之间采用有线回程进行上下文迁移,那么无需在IEEE 802.11标准中定义当前AP MLD和目标AP MLD之间交互上下文(context)所采用的帧类别和具体格式,仅需对当前AP MLD和目标AP MLD之间交互的内容进行定义。由于上述的一些实施例中已经对当前AP MLD和目标AP MLD之间交互的内容进行了详细的设计和解释,那么在本实施例下,只需规定当前AP MLD和目标AP MLD之间交互的信息包含上述的一些实施例中请求帧2和响应帧2携带的内容即可。If a wired backhaul is used for context migration between the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD, the IEEE 802.11 standard does not need to define the frame type and specific format used for the context exchanged between the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD. Instead, the IEEE 802.11 standard only defines the content of the exchange between the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD. Since the content of the exchange between the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD has been designed and explained in detail in some of the aforementioned embodiments, in this embodiment, it is sufficient to specify that the information exchanged between the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD includes the content carried in the request frame 2 and the response frame 2 in some of the aforementioned embodiments.
该实施例所能实现的效果:当前AP MLD和目标AP MLD之间通过有线的回程链路进行信息的交换,不仅避免了竞争信道所带来的时延(可以做到几乎无时延),还让传输的可靠性也得到了保证。Effects that can be achieved by this embodiment: The current AP MLD and the target AP MLD exchange information through a wired backhaul link, which not only avoids the delay caused by channel contention (can achieve almost no delay) but also ensures the reliability of transmission.
图6为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的信息转换方法的流程示意图。如图6所示,所述基于多链路设备漫游的信息转换方法,执行于非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD,其中,所述信息转换方法包括以下至少一个操作:操作601:non-AP MLD在第一接入点多链路设备AP MLD 1与第二接入点多链路设备AP MLD 2之间漫游时,转换所述non-AP MLD和所述AP MLD 1之间的信息以适配所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间的通信。FIG6 is a flow chart illustrating a method for information conversion based on multi-link device roaming according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG6 , the method for information conversion based on multi-link device roaming is performed on a non-AP MLD. The method includes at least one of the following operations: Operation 601: When a non-AP MLD roams between a first access point multi-link device AP MLD 1 and a second access point multi-link device AP MLD 2, the non-AP MLD converts information between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 1 to adapt communication between the non-AP MLD and AP MLD 2.
通过上述技术方案,所述AP MLD 1转换所述non-AP MLD和所述AP MLD 1之间的信息以适配所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间的通信,从而改善所述non-AP MLD漫游所述AP MLD 2时的体验,做到基本无中断的漫游,方便所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2尽快进行正常通信,缩短漫游的时延。Through the above technical solution, the AP MLD 1 converts the information between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1 to adapt to the communication between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming on the AP MLD 2, achieving basically uninterrupted roaming, facilitating the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2 to communicate normally as soon as possible, and shortening the roaming delay.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述non-AP MLD和所述AP MLD 1之间的所述信息包括以下信息中的一个或多个:信道信息、资源调度信息、功率信息、最大发送/接收空间流数目、增强型分布式信道接入EDCA参数集、应急准备通信服务EPCS信息、缓存状态报告BSR信息、序号编号SN、数据包编号PN、块确认BA会话信息、多接入点AP模式、电量信息、目标唤醒时间TWT信息、限定目标唤醒时间服务阶段R-TWT SP信息、业务标识符到链路TID-to-Link的映射、扩展能力信息、 极高吞吐量EHT能力信息、增强多链路EML能力信息、MLD能力和操作信息、和新链路ID。In some embodiments of the present application, the information between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1 includes one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set, emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information, buffer status report BSR information, sequence number SN, data packet number PN, block confirmation BA session information, multi-access point AP mode, power information, target wake-up time TWT information, target wake-up time service phase R-TWT SP information, service identifier to link TID-to-Link mapping, extended capability information, Extremely high throughput (EHT) capability information, enhanced multi-link (EML) capability information, MLD capability and operation information, and new link ID.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述信道信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的信道信息和/或所述non-AP MLD建立的链路对应的信道信息;所述资源调度信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的资源单元RU信息;所述功率信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的发送功率信息;所述最大发送/接收空间流数目用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的最大发送/接收空间流数目;所述EDCA参数集用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的EDCA参数集或用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的EDCA参数集;所述EPCS信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的EPCS能力信息、EPCS订阅信息和EPCS开启状态信息,和/或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2建立EPCS优先接入许可以及EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集;所述BSR信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的缓存状态信息;所述SN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间的帧的SN;所述PN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间已经发送完成的PN,或即将要发送的PN,或未发送的PN;所述BA会话信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的块确认会话信息;所述多AP模式用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的多AP协作模式;所述电量信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的休眠策略信息和/或所支持的休眠机制;所述TWT信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TWT信息;所述R-TWT SP信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的R-TWT SP信息;所述TID-to-Link的映射用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TID-to-Link的映射方案,或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2之间建立的链路的TID-to-Link的映射方案;所述扩展能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的扩展能力信息;所述EHT能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的EHT能力信息;所述EML能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的EML能力信息;所述MLD能力和操作信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的MLD能力和操作信息;所述新链路ID指示为所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间建立连接的链路ID。In some embodiments of the present application, the channel information is used to indicate the channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or the channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD; the resource scheduling information is used to indicate the resource unit RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the power information is used to indicate the transmit power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD; the EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD or to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD. The EDCA parameter set established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the EPCS information is used to indicate the EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or is used to indicate that the non-AP MLD requests to establish an EPCS priority access permission and an EDCA parameter set for EPCS priority access with the AP MLD 2; the BSR information is used to indicate the cache status information of the non-AP MLD; the SN is used to indicate the SN of the frame between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the PN is used to indicate the PN that has been sent between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or the PN that is about to be sent, or Unsent PN; the BA session information is used to indicate the block confirmation session information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the multi-AP mode is used to indicate the multi-AP collaboration mode supported by the non-AP MLD; the power information is used to indicate the sleep policy information and/or supported sleep mechanism of the non-AP MLD; the TWT information is used to indicate the TWT information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the R-TWT SP information is used to indicate the R-TWT SP information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the TID-to-Link mapping is used to indicate the TWT information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP The TID-to-Link mapping scheme established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or the TID-to-Link mapping scheme for indicating the link established between the non-AP MLD request and the AP MLD 2; the extended capability information is used to indicate the extended capability information of the non-AP MLD; the EHT capability information is used to indicate the EHT capability information of the non-AP MLD; the EML capability information is used to indicate the EML capability information of the non-AP MLD; the MLD capability and operation information is used to indicate the MLD capability and operation information of the non-AP MLD; the new link ID indicates the link ID for establishing a connection between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2.
实施例7:上下文迁移所指示的信息在当前AP MLD和目标AP MLD之间进行转换的方法:Example 7: Method for converting information indicated by context migration between the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD:
Non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1之间进行通信时所采用的参数/配置/资源分配等可能并不适配non-AP MLD切换到(目标)AP MLD 2之后的通信需求。因此non-AP MLD在进行漫游时,可能需要将non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1之间的参数/配置/资源分配等做转换/更新,以适配non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2之间的通信需求。具体来说,可能需要对以下参数/配置/资源分配中的一项或多项进行转换/更新:The parameters/configurations/resource allocations used during communication between the non-AP MLD and (current) AP MLD 1 may not be suitable for the communication needs of the non-AP MLD after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, when the non-AP MLD roams, the parameters/configurations/resource allocations between the non-AP MLD and (current) AP MLD 1 may need to be converted/updated to meet the communication needs between the non-AP MLD and (target) AP MLD 2. Specifically, one or more of the following parameters/configurations/resource allocations may need to be converted/updated:
信道和带宽:由于(当前)AP MLD 1与(目标)AP MLD 2分别所在的BSS的信道配置(例如主20MHz信道的编号信道编号(number),工作带宽BW等)可能不一致,因此non-AP MLD切换到(目标)AP MLD 2后,(目标)AP MLD 2需要根据自身所在BSS的信道配置来给non-AP MLD重新进行工作信道配置,例如通知non-AP MLD将其主20MHz信道切换为目标AP MLD 2所在的BSS的主20MHz信道;通知non-AP MLD将工作带宽更新为“non-AP MLD所支持的信道”与“(目标)AP MLD 2所支持的信道”的交集所对应的带宽。Channel and bandwidth: Because the channel configurations of the BSSs where (current) AP MLD 1 and (target) AP MLD 2 are located (for example, the channel number of the main 20 MHz channel, the working bandwidth, etc.) may be inconsistent, after the non-AP MLD switches to the (target) AP MLD 2, the (target) AP MLD 2 needs to reconfigure the working channel for the non-AP MLD based on the channel configuration of its own BSS. For example, it notifies the non-AP MLD to switch its main 20 MHz channel to the main 20 MHz channel of the BSS where the target AP MLD 2 is located; and notifies the non-AP MLD to update the working bandwidth to the bandwidth corresponding to the intersection of "channels supported by the non-AP MLD" and "channels supported by the (target) AP MLD 2".
RU分配:由于(当前)AP MLD 1与(目标)AP MLD 2分别所在的BSS的信道配置(例如主20MHz信道的编号信道,工作带宽BW等)可能不一致,因此non-AP MLD在(当前)AP MLD 1下工作被分配的RU(索引index)在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2后将可能不可用。因此,(目标)AP MLD 2需要根据自身所在BSS的信道配置来给non-AP MLD重新进行RU(index)分配,例如为non-AP MLD更新RU(索引index)。RU Allocation: Because the channel configurations (e.g., primary 20 MHz channel number, operating bandwidth, etc.) of the BSSs in which (current) AP MLD 1 and (target) AP MLD 2 reside may be inconsistent, the RUs (indexes) allocated to the non-AP MLD operating under (current) AP MLD 1 may become unavailable after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to reassign RUs (indexes) to the non-AP MLD based on the channel configuration of its own BSS, for example, by updating the RUs (indexes) for the non-AP MLD.
功率限制(Power Limit):由于(当前)AP MLD 1与(目标)AP MLD 2所支持的关联的(associated)non-AP MLD的发送功率限制(Power Limit,例如最大发送功率,最小发送功率)可能不一致,因此non-AP MLD在(当前)AP MLD 1下工作所采用的功率限制在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2后将可能不适配。因此,(目标)AP MLD 2需要根据自身所能接受的关联的(associated)non-AP MLD的发送功率限制来给non-AP MLD重新进行发送功率限制分配。Power Limit: Because the transmit power limits (e.g., maximum and minimum transmit power) of the associated non-AP MLDs supported by (current) AP MLD 1 and (target) AP MLD 2 may differ, the power limit used by the non-AP MLD under (current) AP MLD 1 may not be compatible after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to reassign the transmit power limit to the non-AP MLD based on the transmit power limit of the associated non-AP MLD that it can accept.
Max TX/RX Nss:由于(当前)AP MLD 1与(目标)AP MLD 2所支持的最大发送或接收空间流数(Nss,Number of Spatial Stream)可能不一致,因此non-AP MLD在(当前)AP MLD 1下工作所采用的Nss在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2后将可能不适配。因此,(目标)AP MLD 2需要根据自身所支持的Max TX/TX Nss来设定non-AP MLD所能使用的最大TX/RX Nss。Max TX/RX Nss: Because the maximum number of transmit or receive spatial streams (Nss) supported by (current) AP MLD 1 and (target) AP MLD 2 may differ, the Nss used by the non-AP MLD under (current) AP MLD 1 may not match after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to set the maximum TX/RX Nss that the non-AP MLD can use based on its own Max TX/TX Nss.
EDCA参数集:Non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1通信时EDCA参数集配置(例如接入类别(AC),(最大竞争窗口CWmax),(最大竞争窗口CWmin),退避计数器(Backoff Counter),任意帧间隔号(AIFSN)和传输机会最大时间长度(TXOP limit)等)可能不适用于non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2 的通信,因此non-AP MLD在(当前)AP MLD 1下工作被分配的EDCA参数集在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2后将可能需要进行更新。因此,(目标)AP MLD 2需要根据自身的工作状态来给non-AP MLD重新进行EDCA参数集分配,例如设置新的接入类别(AC),(最大竞争窗口CWmax),(最大竞争窗口CWmin),退避计数器(Backoff Counter),任意帧间隔号(AIFSN)和传输机会最大时间长度(TXOP limit)等参数。EDCA parameter set: The EDCA parameter set configuration (such as access category (AC), maximum contention window (CWmax), maximum contention window (CWmin), backoff counter (BCC), arbitrary interframe number (AIFSN), and maximum transmission opportunity time (TXOP limit)) when the non-AP MLD communicates with the (current) AP MLD 1 may not be applicable to the non-AP MLD communicating with the (target) AP MLD 2. Because of the communication issues, the EDCA parameter set assigned to the non-AP MLD operating under (current) AP MLD 1 may need to be updated after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to reassign the EDCA parameter set to the non-AP MLD based on its own operating status. For example, it needs to set new parameters such as the access category (AC), maximum contention window (CWmax), maximum contention window (CWmin), backoff counter, arbitrary interframe number (AIFSN), and maximum transmission opportunity time (TXOP limit).
EPCS信息:EPCS信息包括EPCS优先接入服务的订阅状态,开启状态,以及EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集等信息。Non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1通信时EPCS信息的配置(例如订阅状态,开启状态,EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集等)在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2时,EPCS订阅状态和EPCS开启状态要transfer到(目标)AP MLD 2处(无需转换或更新)。但EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集可能需要根据(目标)AP MLD 2的工作状态由(目标)AP MLD 2进行更新。EPCS Information: EPCS information includes the subscription status and activation status of the EPCS priority access service, as well as the EDCA parameter set for EPCS priority access. When a non-AP MLD communicates with (current) AP MLD 1, the EPCS information configuration (e.g., subscription status, activation status, EDCA parameter set for EPCS priority access) is transferred to (target) AP MLD 2 when the non-AP MLD switches to (target) AP MLD 2. The EPCS subscription status and activation status are transferred to (target) AP MLD 2 (no conversion or update is required). However, the EDCA parameter set for EPCS priority access may need to be updated by (target) AP MLD 2 based on its operating status.
BSR相关信息:BSR具体格式和内容参见IEEE 802.11标准的BSR控制子域(BSR Control subfield)和/或QoS控制子域(QoS Control field),例如包括缓存业务的类型以及对应的缓存大小等信息。Non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1通信时的BSR相关信息在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2时可以有两种迁移(transfer)策略:BSR-related information: The specific format and content of the BSR are described in the BSR Control subfield and/or QoS Control subfield of the IEEE 802.11 standard. For example, this information includes the type of cached service and the corresponding cache size. The BSR-related information that a Non-AP MLD communicates with (current) AP MLD 1 can be transferred to (target) AP MLD 2 using two different transfer strategies:
1)将BSR的所有信息无修改地迁移给(目标)AP MLD 2,不作任何修改。1) Migrate all BSR information to (target) AP MLD 2 without any modification.
2)将BSR中所包含的优先级较高的业务对应的信息迁移给(目标)AP MLD 2,BSR中所包含的优先级低的业务对应的信息直接丢弃不迁移给(目标)AP MLD 2,待non-AP MLD切换到(目标)AP MLD 2之后再重新进行缓存并交互BSR信息。2) The information corresponding to the higher-priority services contained in the BSR is migrated to (target) AP MLD 2. The information corresponding to the lower-priority services contained in the BSR is directly discarded and not migrated to (target) AP MLD 2. After the non-AP MLD switches to (target) AP MLD 2, the BSR information is cached again and exchanged.
-SN(序号编号(Sequence Number)):SN即发送方发送的帧的系列号。Non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1通信时的SN在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2时可以有两种迁移策略:-SN (Sequence Number): SN is the sequence number of the frame sent by the sender. The SN of the Non-AP MLD communicating with (current) AP MLD 1 can have two migration strategies when switching to (target) AP MLD 2:
1)将发起AP MLD切换那一刻non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1之间的帧交互所对应的SN无修改地迁移给(目标)AP MLD 2。切换完成后(目标)AP MLD 2与non-AP MLD通信时,(目标)AP MLD 2与non-AP MLD继续之前的SN来传输后续的帧;1) The SN corresponding to the frame exchange between the non-AP MLD and (current) AP MLD 1 at the moment of AP MLD handover is migrated to (target) AP MLD 2 without modification. After the handover is completed, when (target) AP MLD 2 communicates with the non-AP MLD, (target) AP MLD 2 and the non-AP MLD continue to use the previous SN to transmit subsequent frames;
2)将发起AP MLD切换那一刻non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1之间的帧交互所对应的SN丢弃,不迁移给(目标)AP MLD 2。切换完成后(目标)AP MLD 2与non-AP MLD通信时,(目标)AP MLD 2与non-AP MLD重新使用新的SN来传输后续的帧。2) The SN corresponding to the frame exchange between the non-AP MLD and (current) AP MLD 1 at the moment of AP MLD handover is discarded and not transferred to (target) AP MLD 2. After the handover is completed, when (target) AP MLD 2 communicates with the non-AP MLD, (target) AP MLD 2 and the non-AP MLD reuse the new SN to transmit subsequent frames.
-PN(数据包编号(Packet Number)):PN用来对MSDUs,A-MSDUs和MMPDU等中的MPDUs进行编号。Non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1通信时的数据包对应的PN在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2时可以有两种迁移策略:-PN (Packet Number): PN is used to number MSDUs, A-MSDUs, and MPDUs. The PN corresponding to the packet when the Non-AP MLD communicates with (current) AP MLD 1 can have two migration strategies when switching to (target) AP MLD 2:
1)将发起AP MLD切换那一刻non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1之间的帧交互所对应的PN无修改地迁移给(目标)AP MLD 2。切换完成后(目标)AP MLD 2与non-AP MLD通信时,(目标)AP MLD 2与non-AP MLD继续之前的PN来传输后续的帧;1) The PN corresponding to the frame exchange between the non-AP MLD and (current) AP MLD 1 at the time of AP MLD handover is migrated to (target) AP MLD 2 without modification. After the handover is completed, when (target) AP MLD 2 communicates with the non-AP MLD, (target) AP MLD 2 and the non-AP MLD continue to transmit subsequent frames using the previous PN;
2)将发起AP MLD切换那一刻non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1之间的帧交互所对应的PN丢弃,不迁移给(目标)AP MLD 2。切换完成后(目标)AP MLD 2与non-AP MLD通信时,(目标)AP MLD 2与non-AP MLD重新获取数据并使用新的PN来传输后续的帧。2) The PN corresponding to the frame exchange between the non-AP MLD and (current) AP MLD 1 at the moment of AP MLD handover is discarded and not transferred to (target) AP MLD 2. After the handover is completed, when (target) AP MLD 2 communicates with the non-AP MLD, (target) AP MLD 2 and the non-AP MLD reacquire data and use the new PN to transmit subsequent frames.
-BA相关信息:用于指示收发双方所建立的BlockAck会话信息,例如包括BA协议(BA agreement)、BA记分板,(BA Scoreboarding)等,详见IEEE 802.11标准。Non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1通信时的BlockAck会话信息在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2时,BA协议和BA记分板可以有两种迁移策略:BA-related information: Used to indicate the BlockAck session information established by the sender and receiver, such as the BA agreement and BA scoreboarding. For details, see the IEEE 802.11 standard. When the BlockAck session information when the Non-AP MLD communicates with (current) AP MLD 1 is switched to (target) AP MLD 2, the BA agreement and BA scoreboard can have two migration strategies:
1)将发起AP MLD切换那一刻non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1之间的BA协议和BA记分板无修改地迁移给(目标)AP MLD 2。切换完成后(目标)AP MLD 2与non-AP MLD通信时,(目标)AP MLD 2与non-AP MLD之间无需重新建立BA协议,并且采用之前的BA记分板继续进行后续通信。1) The BA agreement and BA scoreboard between the non-AP MLD and (current) AP MLD 1 at the time of AP MLD handover are migrated to (target) AP MLD 2 without modification. After the handover, when (target) AP MLD 2 communicates with the non-AP MLD, there is no need to re-establish the BA agreement between them, and subsequent communications continue using the previous BA scoreboard.
2)将发起AP MLD切换那一刻non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1之间的BA协议终止,不迁移给(目标)AP MLD 2。切换完成后(目标)AP MLD 2与non-AP MLD通信时,(目标)AP MLD 2与non-AP MLD重新建立BA协议并进行新的BA记分板操作。2) The BA agreement between the non-AP MLD and (current) AP MLD 1 is terminated at the moment of AP MLD handover, and the BA is not transferred to (target) AP MLD 2. After the handover is completed, when (target) AP MLD 2 communicates with the non-AP MLD, (target) AP MLD 2 and the non-AP MLD re-establish the BA agreement and perform a new BA scoreboard operation.
-Multi-AP Mode:由于(当前)AP MLD 1与(目标)AP MLD 2所支持的多AP协作模式(例如C-TDMA,C-OFDMA,C-SR,C-BF,J-TX等)可能不一致,因此non-AP MLD在(当前)AP MLD 1下工作所支持的多AP协作模式在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2后将可能无法使用。因此,(目标)AP MLD 2需要根据自身所支持的多AP协作模式以及non-AP MLD所支持的多AP协作模式来取交集然后给non-AP MLD重新进行多AP协作模式的指示。-Multi-AP Mode: Since the multi-AP collaboration modes supported by (current) AP MLD 1 and (target) AP MLD 2 (e.g., C-TDMA, C-OFDMA, C-SR, C-BF, J-TX, etc.) may be inconsistent, the multi-AP collaboration mode supported by the non-AP MLD under (current) AP MLD 1 may not be available after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to take the intersection of its own supported multi-AP collaboration modes and the multi-AP collaboration modes supported by the non-AP MLD and then re-instruct the non-AP MLD on the multi-AP collaboration mode.
-电量相关信息:Non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1通信时电量相关信息(或休眠策略信息) 可能不适用于non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2的通信,因此non-AP MLD在(当前)AP MLD 1下工作所建立的休眠策略在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2后将可能需要进行更新。因此,(目标)AP MLD 2需要根据自身的工作状态来给non-AP MLD重新进行休眠策略分配。-Power-related information: Power-related information (or sleep policy information) when the Non-AP MLD communicates with (current) AP MLD 1 The sleep policy established by the non-AP MLD when operating under (current) AP MLD 1 may not be applicable to communication with (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, the sleep policy established by the non-AP MLD when operating under (current) AP MLD 1 may need to be updated after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to reassign the sleep policy to the non-AP MLD based on its own operating status.
-TWT元素:Non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1通信时建立的TWT SP可能不适用于non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2的通信,因此non-AP MLD在(当前)AP MLD 1下工作所建立的TWT SP在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2后将可能需要进行更新。因此,(目标)AP MLD 2需要根据自身的工作状态来给non-AP MLD重新建立TWT SP。-TWT element: The TWT SP established by the non-AP MLD when communicating with (current) AP MLD 1 may not be applicable to the non-AP MLD's communication with (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, the TWT SP established by the non-AP MLD when operating under (current) AP MLD 1 may need to be updated after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to re-establish the TWT SP for the non-AP MLD based on its own operating status.
-R-TWT元素:Non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1通信时建立的TWT SP可能不适用于non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2的通信,因此non-AP MLD在(当前)AP MLD 1下工作所建立的TWT SP在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2后将可能需要进行更新。因此,(目标)AP MLD 2需要根据自身的工作状态来给non-AP MLD重新建立TWT SP。-R-TWT element: The TWT SP established by the non-AP MLD when communicating with (current) AP MLD 1 may not be applicable to the communication between the non-AP MLD and (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, the TWT SP established by the non-AP MLD when operating under (current) AP MLD 1 may need to be updated after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to re-establish the TWT SP for the non-AP MLD based on its own operating status.
-TID-to-Link映射:Non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1通信时的TID-to-Link映射可能不适用于non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2的通信,例如某个link在(目标)AP MLD 2这一侧不可使用或过载无法承载更多TID等。因此non-AP MLD在(当前)AP MLD 1下工作所执行的TID-to-Link映射在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2后将可能需要进行更新。因此,(目标)AP MLD 2需要根据自身的工作状态来给non-AP MLD重新进行TID-to-Link映射,例如将一部分TID重新映射到新的Link ID上,另一部分TID仍旧保留映射到旧Link ID上。-TID-to-Link Mapping: The TID-to-Link mapping used by the non-AP MLD when communicating with (current) AP MLD 1 may not be applicable to the communication between the non-AP MLD and (target) AP MLD 2, for example, if a link on (target) AP MLD 2 is unavailable or overloaded and cannot carry more TIDs. Therefore, the TID-to-Link mapping used by the non-AP MLD when operating under (current) AP MLD 1 may need to be updated after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to re-map the TID-to-Link mapping for the non-AP MLD based on its own operating status, for example, remapping some TIDs to the new Link ID while retaining other TIDs mapped to the old Link ID.
-扩展能力元素:由于(当前)AP MLD 1与(目标)AP MLD 2所支持的扩展能力可能不一致,因此non-AP MLD在(当前)AP MLD 1下工作所采用的扩展能力元素中的部分能力在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2后将可能不适配。因此,(目标)AP MLD 2需要根据自身的扩展能力信息来设定non-AP MLD所能使用的扩展能力。- Extended Capability Elements: Because the extended capabilities supported by (current) AP MLD 1 and (target) AP MLD 2 may differ, some capabilities in the extended capability elements used by the non-AP MLD when operating under (current) AP MLD 1 may not be compatible after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to configure the extended capabilities that the non-AP MLD can use based on its own extended capability information.
-EHT能力元素:由于(当前)AP MLD 1与(目标)AP MLD 2所支持的极高吞吐量(EHT)能力可能不一致,因此non-AP MLD在(当前)AP MLD 1下工作所采用的极高吞吐量(EHT)中的部分能力在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2后将可能不适配。因此,(目标)AP MLD 2需要根据自身的扩展能力信息来设定non-AP MLD所能使用的极高吞吐量(EHT)能力。-EHT Capability Element: Because the Extreme Throughput (EHT) capabilities supported by (current) AP MLD 1 and (target) AP MLD 2 may differ, some Extreme Throughput (EHT) capabilities used by non-AP MLD under (current) AP MLD 1 may not be compatible after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to configure the Extreme Throughput (EHT) capabilities that non-AP MLD can use based on its own extended capability information.
-New Link ID:Non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1通信时建立的Link ID可能不适用于non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2的通信,因此non-AP MLD在(当前)AP MLD 1下工作所使用的Link ID在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2后将可能需要进行更新。因此,(目标)AP MLD 2需要根据自身已经存在的Link ID来给non-AP MLD重新进行Link ID分配,例如将(目标)AP MLD 2目前未分配出去的Link ID用于切换后non-AP MLD与(目标)AP MLD 2建立的新链路。-New Link ID: The Link ID established when the non-AP MLD communicates with (current) AP MLD 1 may not be suitable for communication between the non-AP MLD and (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, the Link ID used by the non-AP MLD under (current) AP MLD 1 may need to be updated after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. Therefore, (target) AP MLD 2 needs to reassign a Link ID to the non-AP MLD based on its existing Link ID. For example, it can use the Link ID currently unassigned by (target) AP MLD 2 for the new link established between the non-AP MLD and (target) AP MLD 2 after the handover.
该实施例所能实现的效果:Non-AP MLD在切换到目标AP MLD的时候,当前AP MLD与目标AP MLD之间对部分上下文(context)进行更新/重配置,可以方便non-AP MLD与目标AP MLD尽快进行正常通信,缩短漫游的时延。The effect that can be achieved by this embodiment is as follows: When the Non-AP MLD switches to the target AP MLD, the current AP MLD and the target AP MLD update/reconfigure some contexts, which can facilitate normal communication between the non-AP MLD and the target AP MLD as soon as possible and shorten the roaming delay.
漫游完成的判定方法及后续操作设计:Roaming completion determination method and subsequent operation design:
图7A为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法的流程示意图。如图7A所示,所述基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法,执行于非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD,其中,所述通信方法包括以下至少一个操作:操作701A:non-AP MLD由第一接入点多链路设备AP MLD 1漫游到第二接入点多链路设备AP MLD 2之后,由所述non-AP MLD确认漫游的结果。FIG7A is a flow chart illustrating a multi-link device roaming communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG7A , the multi-link device roaming communication method is performed by a non-AP MLD. The communication method includes at least one of the following operations: Operation 701A: After the non-AP MLD roams from a first access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 1 to a second access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 2, the non-AP MLD confirms the roaming result.
通过上述技术方案,由所述non-AP MLD确认漫游的结果,从而改善所述non-AP MLD漫游所述AP MLD 2时的体验,做到基本无中断的漫游,所述non-AP MLD进行漫游完成后的确认操作,能够确保所述non-AP MLD在漫游所述AP MLD 2之后新建立的链路正常工作。Through the above technical solution, the non-AP MLD confirms the roaming result, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming the AP MLD 2 and achieving basically uninterrupted roaming. The confirmation operation performed by the non-AP MLD after the roaming is completed can ensure that the newly established link of the non-AP MLD after roaming the AP MLD 2 works normally.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述non-AP MLD确认漫游的结果包括:所述non-AP MLD向所述AP MLD 2发送漫游确认信息,并接收所述AP MLD 2发送的漫游应答信息。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述non-AP MLD接收所述AP MLD 2发送的所述漫游应答信息之后,所述non-AP MLD向所述AP MLD 1发送漫游完成信息。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述漫游完成信息包括漫游MLD地址字段用于指示完成漫游的所述non-AP MLD的MLD MAC地址。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述漫游确认信息和所述漫游应答信息包括以下组合之一:请求发送RTS帧和清除发送CTS帧、探测请求帧和探测响应帧、多链路探测请求帧和多链路探测响应帧、缓冲状态报告轮询BSRP触发帧和带缓冲状态报告BSR的基于触发的物理层协议数据单元TB PPDU、多用户请求发送帧MU-RTS触发帧和CTS帧、或数据帧和应答帧。In some embodiments of the present application, the non-AP MLD confirming the roaming result includes: the non-AP MLD sending a roaming confirmation message to AP MLD 2 and receiving a roaming response message from AP MLD 2. In some embodiments of the present application, after the non-AP MLD receives the roaming response message from AP MLD 2, the non-AP MLD sends a roaming completion message to AP MLD 1. In some embodiments of the present application, the roaming completion message includes a roaming MLD address field for indicating the MLD MAC address of the non-AP MLD that completed the roaming. In some embodiments of the present application, the roaming confirmation information and the roaming response information include one of the following combinations: a request to send RTS frame and a clear to send CTS frame, a probe request frame and a probe response frame, a multi-link probe request frame and a multi-link probe response frame, a buffer status report polling BSRP trigger frame and a triggered physical layer protocol data unit TB PPDU with a buffer status report BSR, a multi-user request to send frame MU-RTS trigger frame and a CTS frame, or a data frame and a response frame.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述漫游确认信息的帧本体携带转换后的所述non-AP MLD和所述 AP MLD 1之间的信息以适配所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间的通信。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述转换后的所述non-AP MLD和所述AP MLD 1之间的信息包括以下信息中的一个或多个:信道信息、资源调度信息、功率信息、最大发送/接收空间流数目、增强型分布式信道接入EDCA参数集、应急准备通信服务EPCS信息、缓存状态报告BSR信息、序号编号SN、数据包编号PN、块确认BA会话信息、多接入点AP模式、电量信息、目标唤醒时间TWT信息、限定目标唤醒时间服务阶段R-TWT SP信息、业务标识符到链路TID-to-Link的映射、扩展能力信息、极高吞吐量EHT能力信息、增强多链路EML能力信息、MLD能力和操作信息、和新链路ID。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述信道信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的信道信息和/或所述non-AP MLD建立的链路对应的信道信息;所述资源调度信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的资源单元RU信息;所述功率信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的发送功率信息;所述最大发送/接收空间流数目用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的最大发送/接收空间流数目;所述EDCA参数集用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的EDCA参数集或用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的EDCA参数集;所述EPCS信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的EPCS能力信息、EPCS订阅信息和EPCS开启状态信息,和/或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2建立EPCS优先接入许可以及EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集;所述BSR信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的缓存状态信息;所述SN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间的帧的SN;所述PN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间已经发送完成的PN,或即将要发送的PN,或未发送的PN;所述BA会话信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的块确认会话信息;所述多AP模式用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的多AP协作模式;所述电量信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的休眠策略信息和/或所支持的休眠机制;所述TWT信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TWT信息;所述R-TWT SP信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的R-TWT SP信息;所述TID-to-Link的映射用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TID-to-Link的映射方案,或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2之间建立的链路的TID-to-Link的映射方案;所述扩展能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的扩展能力信息;所述EHT能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的EHT能力信息;所述EML能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的EML能力信息;所述MLD能力和操作信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的MLD能力和操作信息;所述新链路ID指示为所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间建立连接的链路ID。In some embodiments of the present application, the frame body of the roaming confirmation information carries the converted non-AP MLD and the The information between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1 after the conversion is adapted to communication between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2. In some embodiments of the present application, the information between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1 after the conversion includes one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, enhanced distributed channel access (EDCA) parameter set, emergency preparedness communication service (EPCS) information, buffer status report (BSR) information, sequence number (SN), packet number (PN), block acknowledgement (BA) session information, multi-access point (AP) mode, power information, target wake time (TWT) information, restricted target wake time service phase (R-TWT) information, service identifier to link (TID-to-Link) mapping, extended capability information, extremely high throughput (EHT) capability information, enhanced multi-link (EML) capability information, MLD capability and operation information, and a new link ID. In some embodiments of the present application, the channel information is used to indicate channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD; the resource scheduling information is used to indicate resource unit RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the power information is used to indicate transmit power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD; the EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD or to indicate the EDCA parameter set established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the EPCS information is used to indicate EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information, and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or to indicate the EDCA parameter set for the non-AP MLD to request to establish EPCS priority access permission and EPCS priority access with the AP MLD 2; and the BSR information is used to indicate the non-AP MLD cache status information; the SN is used to indicate the SN of the frame between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the PN is used to indicate the PN that has been sent between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or the PN that is about to be sent, or the PN that has not been sent; the BA session information is used to indicate the block confirmation session information established by the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the multi-AP mode is used to indicate the multi-AP cooperation mode supported by the non-AP MLD; the power information is used to indicate the sleep policy information and/or the supported sleep mechanism of the non-AP MLD; the TWT information is used to indicate the TWT information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the R-TWT SP information is used to indicate the R-TWT SP information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the TID-to-Link mapping is used to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or for indicating the non-AP MLD request and the AP MLD 2; the extended capability information is used to indicate the extended capability information of the non-AP MLD; the EHT capability information is used to indicate the EHT capability information of the non-AP MLD; the EML capability information is used to indicate the EML capability information of the non-AP MLD; the MLD capability and operation information is used to indicate the MLD capability and operation information of the non-AP MLD; and the new link ID indicates the link ID of the connection established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述通信方法还包括所述non-AP MLD根据所述漫游确认信息执行以下操作中的一项或多项:将工作的主信道和工作带宽切换为所述AP MLD 2所指示的主信道编号和工作带宽;所述将时钟信息调整为所述AP MLD 2的时钟信息;按照所述AP MLD 2所指示的EDCA参数集来准备信道接入的参数;按照所述AP MLD 2所指示的EPCS信息将EPCS优先接入设置为开启/关闭状态,如果为开启状态,还需要按照所述AP MLD 2所指示的EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集进行EPCS业务的竞争发送;按照所述AP MLD 2所指示的SN来标记与所述AP MLD 2之间通信的下一个帧的SN;按照所述AP MLD 2所指示的PN来标记与所述AP MLD 2之间通信的下一个媒介接入控制协议数据单元MPDU的PN;按照所述AP MLD 2所指示的BA会话信息来更新与所述AP MLD 2之间通信的下一个数据传输的BA记分板;按照所述AP MLD 2所指示的多AP模式来准备信道资源抢占,从而发起相应的多AP协作请求;按照所述AP MLD 2所指示的电量信息,调整休眠窗口、休眠间隔和时钟信息;按照所述AP MLD 2所指示的TWT信息和时钟信息来调整TWT SP信息;按照所述AP MLD 2所指示的R-TWT信息和时钟信息来调整R-TWT SP信息,在响应的R-TWT SP信息开始前保持静默/休眠状态;按照所述AP MLD 2所指示的TID-to-Link的映射来重新将自身的相关业务映射到新的链路上准备发送;按照所述AP MLD 2所指示的扩展能力信息来启用/禁用扩展能力;和按照所述AP MLD 2所指示的EHT能力信息来启用/禁用EHT能力。In some embodiments of the present application, the communication method also includes the non-AP MLD performing one or more of the following operations according to the roaming confirmation information: switching the working main channel and working bandwidth to the main channel number and working bandwidth indicated by the AP MLD 2; adjusting the clock information to the clock information of the AP MLD 2; preparing channel access parameters according to the EDCA parameter set indicated by the AP MLD 2; setting the EPCS priority access to an on/off state according to the EPCS information indicated by the AP MLD 2, and if it is in the on state, it is also necessary to perform competitive transmission of EPCS services according to the EDCA parameter set of the EPCS priority access indicated by the AP MLD 2; marking the SN of the next frame communicated with the AP MLD 2 according to the SN indicated by the AP MLD 2; marking the PN of the next media access control protocol data unit MPDU communicated with the AP MLD 2 according to the PN indicated by the AP MLD 2; and The BA scoreboard of the next data transmission communicated with the AP MLD 2 is updated according to the BA session information indicated by the AP MLD 2; the channel resource preemption is prepared according to the multi-AP mode indicated by the AP MLD 2, thereby initiating a corresponding multi-AP collaboration request; the sleep window, sleep interval and clock information are adjusted according to the power information indicated by the AP MLD 2; the TWT SP information is adjusted according to the TWT information and clock information indicated by the AP MLD 2; the R-TWT SP information is adjusted according to the R-TWT information and clock information indicated by the AP MLD 2, and the silent/sleeping state is maintained before the start of the responding R-TWT SP information; the related services of the own are remapped to the new link according to the TID-to-Link mapping indicated by the AP MLD 2 for preparation for sending; the extended capability is enabled/disabled according to the extended capability information indicated by the AP MLD 2; and the EHT capability is enabled/disabled according to the EHT capability information indicated by the AP MLD 2.
实施例8:non-AP MLD进行漫游确认(confirm)的方法:Example 8: Method for non-AP MLD to confirm roaming:
Non-AP MLD完成上述由当前AP MLD到目标AP MLD的切换(漫游)之后,可以由non-AP MLD对切换的结果做确认。如图7B所示,non-AP MLD在与(目标)AP MLD 2新建立的链路上(例如link 2’)发送一个初始控制帧(initial control frame,该帧属于控制帧的类型)漫游确认帧(Confirm frame),对新建立的链路进行连通性测试,如果(目标)AP MLD 2收到了non-AP MLD发送的漫游确认帧(Confirm frame),则在收到该帧的链路上响应一个漫游应答帧(Ack frame),代表漫游后建立的链路正常,漫游完成。After the non-AP MLD completes the switchover (roaming) from the current AP MLD to the target AP MLD, the non-AP MLD can confirm the switchover result. As shown in Figure 7B, the non-AP MLD sends an initial control frame (a control frame type) or roaming confirmation frame (Confirm frame) on the newly established link (e.g., link 2') with (target) AP MLD 2 to test the connectivity of the newly established link. If (target) AP MLD 2 receives the roaming confirmation frame sent by the non-AP MLD, it responds with a roaming acknowledgment frame (Ack frame) on the link where the frame was received, indicating that the established link is normal and roaming is complete.
除此之外,还可以有以下2种操作,来确保实现non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1断开连接: In addition, you can perform the following two operations to ensure that the non-AP MLD is disconnected from the (current) AP MLD 1:
选项1:non-AP MLD收到(目标)AP MLD 2响应漫游应答帧(Ack frame)之后,在link 1上向(当前)AP MLD 1发一个漫游完成帧。Option 1: After receiving the roaming acknowledgment frame (Ack frame) from (target) AP MLD 2, the non-AP MLD sends a roaming completion frame to (current) AP MLD 1 on link 1.
选项2:(目标)AP MLD 2在向non-AP MLD响应漫游应答帧(Ack frame)之后,通过回程链路(backhaul link)向(当前)AP MLD 1再发一个漫游完成帧。Option 2: After (target) AP MLD 2 responds with a roaming acknowledgment frame (Ack frame) to the non-AP MLD, it sends a roaming completion frame to (current) AP MLD 1 via the backhaul link.
通过上述2种选项中的任何一种,(当前)AP MLD 1收到漫游完成帧之后便可立即断开与该切换到(目标)AP MLD 2的non-AP MLD的连接(delete link),删除与该non-AP MLD有关的上下文(context)信息(具体信息见前面实施例的设计)。Through any of the above two options, after receiving the roaming completion frame, the (current) AP MLD 1 can immediately disconnect (delete link) from the non-AP MLD that is switched to the (target) AP MLD 2, and delete the context information related to the non-AP MLD (see the design of the previous embodiment for specific information).
该实施例所能实现的效果:non-AP MLD进行漫游完成后的确认操作,能够确保non-AP MLD在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2之后新建立的链路正常工作,也能够确保non-AP MLD在换到(目标)AP MLD 2之后断开与(当前)AP MLD 1的连接,此外还用于宣告接下来(目标)AP MLD 2为non-AP MLD继续服务。The effects that can be achieved by this embodiment are: the confirmation operation performed by the non-AP MLD after roaming is completed can ensure that the newly established link of the non-AP MLD works normally after switching to (target) AP MLD 2, and can also ensure that the non-AP MLD disconnects from the (current) AP MLD 1 after switching to (target) AP MLD 2. In addition, it is also used to announce that the next (target) AP MLD 2 will continue to serve the non-AP MLD.
图8A为本申请实施例提供的基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法的流程示意图。如图8A所示,所述基于多链路设备漫游的通信方法,执行于接入点多链路设备AP MLD,其中,所述通信方法包括以下至少一个操作:操作801A:非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD由第一接入点多链路设备AP MLD 1漫游到第二接入点多链路设备AP MLD 2之后,由所述AP MLD 2确认漫游的结果。FIG8A is a flow chart illustrating a multi-link device roaming communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG8A , the multi-link device roaming communication method is executed by an access point multi-link device (AP MLD), wherein the communication method includes at least one of the following operations: Operation 801A: After a non-AP MLD roams from a first access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 1 to a second access point multi-link device (AP MLD) 2, AP MLD 2 confirms the roaming result.
通过上述技术方案,由所述AP MLD 2确认漫游的结果,从而改善所述non-AP MLD漫游所述AP MLD 2时的体验,做到基本无中断的漫游,所述AP MLD 2进行漫游完成后的确认操作,能够确保所述non-AP MLD在漫游所述AP MLD 2之后新建立的链路正常工作。Through the above technical solution, the AP MLD 2 confirms the roaming result, thereby improving the experience of the non-AP MLD when roaming on the AP MLD 2 and achieving basically uninterrupted roaming. The confirmation operation performed by the AP MLD 2 after the roaming is completed can ensure that the newly established link of the non-AP MLD after roaming on the AP MLD 2 works normally.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述AP MLD 2确认漫游的结果包括:所述AP MLD 2向所述non-AP MLD发送漫游确认信息,并接收所述non-AP MLD发送的漫游应答信息。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述AP MLD 2接收所述non-AP MLD发送的所述漫游应答信息之后,所述AP MLD 2向所述AP MLD 1发送漫游完成信息。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述漫游完成信息包括漫游MLD地址字段用于指示完成漫游的所述non-AP MLD的MLD MAC地址。In some embodiments of the present application, AP MLD 2 confirming the roaming result includes: AP MLD 2 sending a roaming confirmation message to the non-AP MLD and receiving a roaming response message from the non-AP MLD. In some embodiments of the present application, after AP MLD 2 receives the roaming response message from the non-AP MLD, AP MLD 2 sends a roaming completion message to AP MLD 1. In some embodiments of the present application, the roaming completion message includes a roaming MLD address field for indicating the MLD MAC address of the non-AP MLD that completed the roaming.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述漫游确认信息和所述漫游应答信息包括以下组合之一:请求发送RTS帧和清除发送CTS帧、探测请求帧和探测响应帧、多链路探测请求帧和多链路探测响应帧、缓冲状态报告轮询BSRP触发帧和带缓冲状态报告BSR的基于触发的物理层协议数据单元TB PPDU、多用户请求发送帧MU-RTS触发帧和CTS帧、或数据帧和应答帧。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述漫游确认信息的帧本体携带转换后的所述non-AP MLD和所述AP MLD 1之间的信息以适配所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间的通信。In some embodiments of the present application, the roaming confirmation message and the roaming response message include one of the following combinations: a request-to-send (RTS) frame and a clear-to-send (CTS) frame, a probe request frame and a probe response frame, a multilink probe request frame and a multilink probe response frame, a buffer status report poll (BSRP) trigger frame and a trigger-based physical layer protocol data unit (TB) PPDU with a buffer status report (BSR), a multi-user request-to-send (MU-RTS) trigger frame and a CTS frame, or a data frame and a response frame. In some embodiments of the present application, the frame body of the roaming confirmation message carries converted information between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1 to adapt the communication between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述转换后的所述non-AP MLD和所述AP MLD 1之间的信息包括以下信息中的一个或多个:信道信息、资源调度信息、功率信息、最大发送/接收空间流数目、增强型分布式信道接入EDCA参数集、应急准备通信服务EPCS信息、缓存状态报告BSR信息、序号编号SN、数据包编号PN、块确认BA会话信息、多接入点AP模式、电量信息、目标唤醒时间TWT信息、限定目标唤醒时间服务阶段R-TWT SP信息、业务标识符到链路TID-to-Link的映射、扩展能力信息、极高吞吐量EHT能力信息、增强多链路EML能力信息、MLD能力和操作信息、和新链路ID。In some embodiments of the present application, the information between the converted non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1 includes one or more of the following information: channel information, resource scheduling information, power information, maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams, enhanced distributed channel access EDCA parameter set, emergency preparedness communication service EPCS information, buffer status report BSR information, sequence number SN, data packet number PN, block acknowledgment BA session information, multi-access point AP mode, power information, target wake-up time TWT information, limited target wake-up time service phase R-TWT SP information, service identifier to link TID-to-Link mapping, extended capability information, extremely high throughput EHT capability information, enhanced multi-link EML capability information, MLD capability and operation information, and new link ID.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述信道信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的信道信息和/或所述non-AP MLD建立的链路对应的信道信息;所述资源调度信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的资源单元RU信息;所述功率信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1进行通信所采用的发送功率信息;所述最大发送/接收空间流数目用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的最大发送/接收空间流数目;所述EDCA参数集用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的EDCA参数集或用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的EDCA参数集;所述EPCS信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD支持的EPCS能力信息、EPCS订阅信息和EPCS开启状态信息,和/或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2建立EPCS优先接入许可以及EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集;所述BSR信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的缓存状态信息;所述SN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间的帧的SN;所述PN用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间已经发送完成的PN,或即将要发送的PN,或未发送的PN;所述BA会话信息用于指示 所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1所建立的块确认会话信息;所述多AP模式用于指示所述non-AP MLD所支持的多AP协作模式;所述电量信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的休眠策略信息和/或所支持的休眠机制;所述TWT信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TWT信息;所述R-TWT SP信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的R-TWT SP信息;所述TID-to-Link的映射用于指示所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 1之间建立的TID-to-Link的映射方案,或用于指示所述non-AP MLD请求与所述AP MLD 2之间建立的链路的TID-to-Link的映射方案;所述扩展能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的扩展能力信息;所述EHT能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的EHT能力信息;所述EML能力信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的EML能力信息;所述MLD能力和操作信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD的MLD能力和操作信息;所述新链路ID指示为所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD 2之间建立连接的链路ID。In some embodiments of the present application, the channel information is used to indicate channel information supported by the non-AP MLD and/or channel information corresponding to the link established by the non-AP MLD; the resource scheduling information is used to indicate resource unit RU information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the power information is used to indicate transmit power information used by the non-AP MLD to communicate with the AP MLD 1; the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams is used to indicate the maximum number of transmit/receive spatial streams supported by the non-AP MLD; the EDCA parameter set is used to indicate the EDCA parameter set supported by the non-AP MLD or to indicate the EDCA parameter set established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the EPCS information is used to indicate EPCS capability information, EPCS subscription information, and EPCS activation status information supported by the non-AP MLD, and/or to indicate the EDCA parameter set for the non-AP MLD to request to establish EPCS priority access permission and EPCS priority access with the AP MLD 2; and the BSR information is used to indicate the non-AP MLD cache status information; the SN is used to indicate the SN of the frame between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the PN is used to indicate the PN that has been sent, the PN that is about to be sent, or the PN that has not been sent between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the BA session information is used to indicate The block confirmation session information established by the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the multi-AP mode is used to indicate the multi-AP cooperation mode supported by the non-AP MLD; the power information is used to indicate the sleep policy information and/or the supported sleep mechanism of the non-AP MLD; the TWT information is used to indicate the TWT information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the R-TWT SP information is used to indicate the R-TWT SP information established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1; the TID-to-Link mapping is used to indicate the TID-to-Link mapping scheme established between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 1, or for indicating the TID-to-Link mapping scheme of the link established between the non-AP MLD request and the AP MLD 2; the extended capability information is used to indicate the extended capability information of the non-AP MLD; the EHT capability information is used to indicate the EHT capability information of the non-AP MLD; the EML capability information is used to indicate the non-AP MLD EML capability information; the MLD capability and operation information is used to indicate the MLD capability and operation information of the non-AP MLD; the new link ID indicates the link ID for establishing a connection between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD 2.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述通信方法还包括所述AP MLD 2结合所述non-AP MLD的工作状态来进行所述non-AP MLD传输的调度。In some embodiments of the present application, the communication method also includes the AP MLD 2 scheduling the non-AP MLD transmission in combination with the working status of the non-AP MLD.
实施例9:目标AP MLD进行漫游confirm的方法:Example 9: Method for target AP MLD to confirm roaming:
Non-AP MLD完成上述由当前AP MLD到目标AP MLD的切换(漫游)之后,还可以由(目标)AP MLD 2对切换的结果做确认。如图8B所示,(目标)AP MLD 2在与non-AP MLD新建立的link(例如link 2’)上发送一个初始控制帧(initial control frame,该帧属于控制帧的类型)漫游确认帧,对新建立的link进行连通性测试,如果non-AP MLD收到了(目标)AP MLD 2发送的漫游确认帧,则在收到该帧的链路上响应一个漫游应答帧(Ack frame),代表漫游后建立的链路正常,漫游完成。After the non-AP MLD completes the switchover (roaming) from the current AP MLD to the target AP MLD, (target) AP MLD 2 can also confirm the switchover result. As shown in Figure 8B, (target) AP MLD 2 sends an initial control frame (a roaming confirmation frame) on the newly established link (e.g., link 2') with the non-AP MLD to test the connectivity of the newly established link. If the non-AP MLD receives the roaming confirmation frame sent by (target) AP MLD 2, it responds with a roaming acknowledgment frame (Ack frame) on the link where the frame was received, indicating that the established link is normal and roaming is complete.
除此之外,还可以有以下2种操作,来实现non-AP MLD与(当前)AP MLD 1断开连接:In addition, the following two operations can be used to disconnect the non-AP MLD from the (current) AP MLD 1:
选项1:non-AP MLD在向(目标)AP MLD 2响应漫游Ack frame之后,再在link 1上向(当前)AP MLD 1发一个漫游完成帧;Option 1: After the non-AP MLD responds with a Roaming Ack frame to (target) AP MLD 2, it sends a Roaming Completion frame to (current) AP MLD 1 on Link 1.
选项2:(目标)AP MLD 2在收到non-AP MLD响应的漫游应答帧之后,通过回程链路向(当前)AP MLD 1发一个漫游完成帧。Option 2: After receiving the roaming response frame from the non-AP MLD, (target) AP MLD 2 sends a roaming completion frame to (current) AP MLD 1 via the backhaul link.
通过上述2种选项中的任何一种,(当前)AP MLD 1收到漫游完成帧之后便可立即断开与该切换到(目标)AP MLD 2的non-AP MLD的连接(delete link),删除与该non-AP MLD有关的上下文(context)信息(具体信息见前面实施例的设计)。Through any of the above two options, after receiving the roaming completion frame, the (current) AP MLD 1 can immediately disconnect (delete link) from the non-AP MLD that is switched to the (target) AP MLD 2, and delete the context information related to the non-AP MLD (see the design of the previous embodiment for specific information).
该实施例所能实现的效果:(目标)AP MLD 2进行漫游完成后的确认操作,除了能够确保non-AP MLD在切换到(目标)AP MLD 2之后新建立的链路正常工作,确保non-AP MLD在换到(目标)AP MLD 2之后断开与(当前)AP MLD 1的连接,宣告接下来(目标)AP MLD 2为non-AP MLD继续服务之外,(目标)AP MLD 2还能给通过新的漫游确认帧(见实施例10)携带上下文迁移之后更新的内容给non-AP MLD,在一定程度上保证了(目标)AP MLD 2能够迅速为non-AP MLD提供后续服务,进一步降低non-AP MLD漫游过程中的数据中断/时延。The effects that can be achieved by this embodiment are: (target) AP MLD 2 performs the confirmation operation after roaming is completed. In addition to ensuring that the newly established link of the non-AP MLD after switching to the (target) AP MLD 2 works normally, and ensuring that the non-AP MLD disconnects from the (current) AP MLD 1 after switching to the (target) AP MLD 2, and announcing that the (target) AP MLD 2 will continue to serve the non-AP MLD, (target) AP MLD 2 can also carry the updated content after the context migration to the non-AP MLD through a new roaming confirmation frame (see Example 10), which to a certain extent ensures that the (target) AP MLD 2 can quickly provide subsequent services to the non-AP MLD, further reducing data interruption/delay during the roaming process of the non-AP MLD.
实施例10:漫游确认帧、漫游应答帧和漫游完成帧格式设计:Example 10: Format design of roaming confirmation frame, roaming response frame and roaming completion frame:
本申请的一些实施例中non-AP MLD和(目标)AP MLD 2之间交互的漫游确认帧和漫游应答帧可以是以下组合中的任何一种:漫游确认帧等于RTS帧;漫游应答帧等于CTS帧。漫游确认帧等于探测请求帧;漫游应答帧等于探测响应帧。漫游确认帧等于多链路探测请求帧;漫游应答帧等于多链路探测响应帧。漫游确认帧等于BSRP触发帧;漫游应答帧等于带BSR的TB PPDU。漫游确认帧等于MU-RTS触发帧;漫游应答帧等于CTS帧。漫游确认帧等于数据帧;漫游应答帧等于应答帧。In some embodiments of the present application, the roaming confirmation frame and roaming response frame exchanged between the non-AP MLD and the (target) AP MLD 2 can be any of the following combinations: the roaming confirmation frame is equal to the RTS frame; the roaming response frame is equal to the CTS frame. The roaming confirmation frame is equal to the probe request frame; the roaming response frame is equal to the probe response frame. The roaming confirmation frame is equal to the multilink probe request frame; the roaming response frame is equal to the multilink probe response frame. The roaming confirmation frame is equal to the BSRP trigger frame; the roaming response frame is equal to the TB PPDU with BSR. The roaming confirmation frame is equal to the MU-RTS trigger frame; the roaming response frame is equal to the CTS frame. The roaming confirmation frame is equal to the data frame; the roaming response frame is equal to the response frame.
图9A为本申请实施例提供的漫游确认帧的格式的示意图,除了以上示例性的帧之外,还可以新定义漫游确认帧由(目标)AP MLD 2发送,如图9A所示,帧本体携带的信息为本申请的一些实施例完成上下文(context)转换/更新后的全部信息或部分信息。对应地non-AP MLD可以通过应答帧(Ack frame)进行响应。FIG9A illustrates the format of a roaming confirmation frame provided by an embodiment of the present application. In addition to the exemplary frames described above, a new roaming confirmation frame may be defined, sent by (target) AP MLD 2. As shown in FIG9A , the frame body carries all or part of the information after context conversion/update in some embodiments of the present application. Correspondingly, the non-AP MLD may respond with an acknowledgment frame (Ack frame).
图9B为本申请实施例提供的漫游完成帧的格式的示意图,一种可能的漫游完成帧格式设计如下图9B所示,其中漫游MLD地址字段用于指示完成漫游的non-AP MLD的MLD MAC地址,(当前)AP MLD 1收到该帧之后,按照MLD MAC地址的指示,断开与漫游MLD地址所指示的non-AP MLD的连接(delete link),删除与该non-AP MLD有关的上下文(context)信息(具体信息见前面实施例的设计)。FIG9B is a schematic diagram of the format of a roaming completion frame provided in an embodiment of the present application. A possible roaming completion frame format is shown in FIG9B , wherein the roaming MLD address field is used to indicate the MLD MAC address of the non-AP MLD that completed the roaming. After receiving the frame, the (current) AP MLD 1 disconnects from the non-AP indicated by the roaming MLD address according to the indication of the MLD MAC address. The MLD connection (delete link) deletes the context information related to the non-AP MLD (for details, see the design of the previous embodiment).
该实施例所能实现的效果:对non-AP MLD进行漫游完成后的确认操作所使用的帧进行了设计,保证漫游完成后的确认操作的完整性。此外,既可以使用已经存在的帧来进行此操作,降低设计和信令的复杂度,还可以使用新设计的帧来进行此操作,让(目标)AP MLD 2为non-AP MLD准备好接下来的传输的资源,降低了漫游的时延。This embodiment achieves the following effects: The frames used by the non-AP MLD to confirm roaming completion are designed to ensure the integrity of the confirmation operation. Furthermore, this operation can be performed using existing frames, reducing design and signaling complexity, or using newly designed frames, allowing (target) AP MLD 2 to prepare resources for the non-AP MLD's subsequent transmission, thereby reducing roaming latency.
实施例11:漫游完成后续行为设计:Example 11: Design of subsequent actions after roaming is completed:
漫游完成后续行为指的是本实施利所设计的non-AP MLD和(目标)AP MLD 2之间交互漫游确认帧和漫游应答帧之后,non-AP MLD和(目标)AP MLD 2各自需要进行的操作(行为)。Post-roaming behavior refers to the operations (behaviors) that the non-AP MLD and (target) AP MLD 2 need to perform respectively after the non-AP MLD and (target) AP MLD 2 exchange roaming confirmation frames and roaming response frames as designed by this implementation.
Non-AP MLD的行为设计:Behavioral design of Non-AP MLD:
Non-AP MLD需要根据(目标)AP MLD 2发送的链路重配置响应帧和/或漫游确认帧中的相关信息指示来执行以下操作中的一项或多项:The Non-AP MLD needs to perform one or more of the following operations based on the relevant information indicated in the Link Reconfiguration Response frame and/or Roaming Confirm frame sent by the (target) AP MLD 2:
-将工作的主信道和工作带宽切换为(目标)AP MLD 2所指示的主信道编号和工作带宽。-Switch the working main channel and working bandwidth to the main channel number and working bandwidth indicated by (target) AP MLD 2.
-将自身的时钟信息(TSF等)调整为(目标)AP MLD 2的时钟信息,保持时钟同步,方便后续调度。-Adjust its own clock information (TSF, etc.) to the clock information of (target) AP MLD 2 to keep the clock synchronized and facilitate subsequent scheduling.
-按照(目标)AP MLD 2所指示的EDCA参数集来准备信道接入的参数(例如接入类别(AC),(最大竞争窗口CWmax),(最大竞争窗口CWmin),退避计数器(Backoff Counter),任意帧间隔号(AIFSN)和传输机会最大时间长度(TXOP limit)等)。- Prepare channel access parameters (such as access category (AC), (maximum contention window CWmax), (maximum contention window CWmin), backoff counter (Backoff Counter), arbitrary frame interval number (AIFSN) and maximum transmission opportunity time length (TXOP limit)) according to the EDCA parameter set indicated by the (target) AP MLD 2.
-按照(目标)AP MLD 2所指示的EPCS信息将EPCS优先接入设置为开启/关闭状态,如果为开启状态和,还需要按照(目标)AP MLD 2所指示的EPCS优先接入的EDCA参数集进行EPCS业务的竞争发送。;- Set EPCS priority access to on/off according to the EPCS information indicated by (target) AP MLD 2. If it is on, it is also necessary to perform contention transmission of EPCS services according to the EDCA parameter set for EPCS priority access indicated by (target) AP MLD 2.
-按照(目标)AP MLD 2所指示的SN来标记与(目标)AP MLD 2之间通信的下一个帧的序号编号(Sequence Number)。-Mark the sequence number (Sequence Number) of the next frame communicated with (target) AP MLD 2 according to the SN indicated by (target) AP MLD 2.
-按照(目标)AP MLD 2所指示的PN来标记与(目标)AP MLD 2之间通信的下一个MPDU的数据包编号(Packet Number)。-Mark the packet number (Packet Number) of the next MPDU communicated with (target) AP MLD 2 according to the PN indicated by (target) AP MLD 2.
-按照(目标)AP MLD 2所指示的BA相关信息来更新与(目标)AP MLD 2之间通信的下一个数据传输的BA记分板(Scoreboarding)。-Update the BA scoreboard for the next data transmission communicated with (target) AP MLD 2 according to the BA related information indicated by (target) AP MLD 2.
-按照(目标)AP MLD 2所指示的多AP模式来准备信道资源抢占,从而发起相应的多AP协作请求。-Prepare for channel resource preemption according to the multi-AP mode indicated by (target) AP MLD 2, thereby initiating the corresponding multi-AP collaboration request.
-按照(目标)AP MLD 2所指示的电量相关信息,调整自己的休眠窗口,休眠间隔和时钟信息(TSF)等。-Adjust its own sleep window, sleep interval and clock information (TSF) according to the power-related information indicated by (target) AP MLD 2.
-按照(目标)AP MLD 2所指示的TWT元素和时钟信息(TSF)来调整TWT SP。-Adjust the TWT SP according to the TWT elements and clock information (TSF) indicated by the (target) AP MLD 2.
-按照(目标)AP MLD 2所指示的R-TWT和时钟信息(TSF)来调整R-TWT SP,在响应的R-TWT SP开始前保持静默/休眠状态。-Adjust the R-TWT SP according to the R-TWT and clock information (TSF) indicated by the (target) AP MLD 2, and remain silent/sleep before the responding R-TWT SP starts.
-按照(目标)AP MLD 2所指示的TID-to-Link映射信息来重新将自身的相关业务映射到新的link上准备发送。-Remap its own related services to the new link and prepare for sending according to the TID-to-Link mapping information indicated by (target) AP MLD 2.
-按照(目标)AP MLD 2所指示的扩展能力元素来启用/禁用(enable/disable)自身的某些扩展能。- Enable/disable some of its own extended capabilities according to the extended capability elements indicated by (target) AP MLD 2.
-按照(目标)AP MLD 2所指示的EHT能力元素来启用/禁用(enable/disable)自身的某些极高吞吐量能力。- Enable/disable certain of its own extreme high throughput capabilities according to the EHT capability element indicated by the (target) AP MLD 2.
(目标)AP MLD 2的行为设计:(Target) Behavioral design of AP MLD 2:
(目标)AP MLD 2需要结合新切换过来的non-AP MLD以及当前正在服务的其它non-AP MLDs的工作状态(例如BSR信息,信道状态信息)等来重新进行non-AP MLD传输的调度即可。(Target) AP MLD 2 needs to reschedule non-AP MLD transmission based on the working status of the newly switched non-AP MLD and other non-AP MLDs currently in service (such as BSR information, channel status information).
注:其它的行为在上下文迁移完成后和/或发送(接收)漫游确认帧时已经完成。Note: Other actions are completed after the context transfer is completed and/or the roaming confirmation frame is sent (received).
该实施例所能实现的效果:对漫游完成后的行为进行了设计,让(目标)AP MLD 2和non-AP MLD都准备好接下来的传输,从一定程度上降低了漫游的时延。The effect that can be achieved by this embodiment is as follows: The behavior after roaming is completed is designed so that both (target) AP MLD 2 and non-AP MLD are ready for the next transmission, thereby reducing the roaming delay to a certain extent.
图10是本申请实施例提供的一种无线通信设备500示意性结构图。该无线通信设备可以是中继通信设备,也可以是AP,也可以是STA,图10所示的无线通信设备500包括处理器510,处理器510可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。在本申请的一些实施例中,AP包括AP STA或AP MLD,STA包含AP STA或non-AP STA或AP MLD或non-AP MLD。Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication device 500 provided in an embodiment of the present application. The wireless communication device can be a relay communication device, an AP, or a STA. The wireless communication device 500 shown in Figure 10 includes a processor 510, which can call and execute a computer program from a memory to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application. In some embodiments of the present application, an AP includes an AP STA or an AP MLD, and a STA includes an AP STA or a non-AP STA or an AP MLD or a non-AP MLD.
可选地,如图10所示,无线通信设备500还可以包括存储器520。其中,处理器510可以从存 储器520中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。其中,存储器520可以是独立于处理器510的一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器510中。Optionally, as shown in FIG10 , the wireless communication device 500 may further include a memory 520. The processor 510 may The computer program is called and executed in the memory 520 to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application. The memory 520 can be a separate device independent of the processor 510 or integrated into the processor 510.
可选地,如图10所示,无线通信设备500还可以包括收发器530,处理器510可以控制该收发器530与其他设备进行通信,具体地,可以向其他设备发送信息或数据,或接收其他设备发送的信息或数据。其中,收发器530可以包括发射机和接收机。收发器530还可以进一步包括天线,天线的数量可以为一个或多个。Optionally, as shown in FIG10 , the wireless communication device 500 may further include a transceiver 530. The processor 510 may control the transceiver 530 to communicate with other devices. Specifically, the transceiver 530 may send information or data to other devices or receive information or data sent by other devices. The transceiver 530 may include a transmitter and a receiver. The transceiver 530 may further include one or more antennas.
可选地,该无线通信设备500具体可为本申请实施例的中继通信设备,并且该无线通信设备500可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由中继通信设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the wireless communication device 500 may specifically be a relay communication device in an embodiment of the present application, and the wireless communication device 500 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the relay communication device in each method in the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
可选地,该无线通信设备500具体可为本申请实施例的移动AP,并且该无线通信设备500可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由AP实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the wireless communication device 500 may specifically be a mobile AP in an embodiment of the present application, and the wireless communication device 500 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the AP in each method in the embodiment of the present application, which will not be described in detail here for the sake of brevity.
可选地,该无线通信设备700具体可为本申请实施例的STA,并且该无线通信设备700可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由STA实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。在本申请的一些实施例中,STA包含AP STA或non-AP STA或AP MLD或non-AP MLD。Optionally, the wireless communication device 700 may be a STA in the embodiments of the present application, and the wireless communication device 700 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the STA in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, these processes are not further described here. In some embodiments of the present application, the STA includes an AP STA or a non-AP STA or an AP MLD or a non-AP MLD.
图11是本申请实施例的芯片的示意性结构图。图11所示的芯片600包括处理器610,处理器610可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。Figure 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application. The chip 600 shown in Figure 11 includes a processor 610, which can call and run a computer program from a memory to implement the method according to the embodiment of the present application.
可选地,如图11所示,芯片600还可以包括存储器620。其中,处理器610可以从存储器620中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。其中,存储器620可以是独立于处理器610的一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器610中。Optionally, as shown in FIG11 , the chip 600 may further include a memory 620. The processor 610 may call and execute a computer program from the memory 620 to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application. The memory 620 may be a separate device independent of the processor 610 or may be integrated into the processor 610.
可选地,该芯片600还可以包括输入接口630。其中,处理器610可以控制该输入接口630与其他设备或芯片进行通信,具体地,可以获取其他设备或芯片发送的信息或数据。Optionally, the chip 600 may further include an input interface 630. The processor 610 may control the input interface 630 to communicate with other devices or chips, and specifically, may obtain information or data sent by other devices or chips.
可选地,该芯片600还可以包括输出接口640。其中,处理器610可以控制该输出接口640与其他设备或芯片进行通信,具体地,可以向其他设备或芯片输出信息或数据。Optionally, the chip 600 may further include an output interface 640. The processor 610 may control the output interface 640 to communicate with other devices or chips, and specifically, may output information or data to other devices or chips.
可选地,该芯片可应用于本申请实施例中的中继通信设备,并且该芯片可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由中继通信设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the chip can be applied to the relay communication device in the embodiments of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the relay communication device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
可选地,该芯片可应用于本申请实施例中的AP,并且该芯片可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由AP实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the chip can be applied to the AP in the embodiments of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the AP in each method in the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they are not described here.
可选地,该芯片可应用于本申请实施例中的STA,并且该芯片可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由STA实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the chip can be applied to the STA in the embodiments of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the STA in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they are not described here.
图12是本申请实施例提供的一种无线通信系统700的示意性框图。如图12所示,该通信系统700包括AP 710、中继通信设备720和STA 730。其中,AP 710可以用于实现上述方法中由AP实现的相应的功能,中继通信设备720可以用于实现上述方法中由中继通信设备实现的相应的功能,以及STA 730可以用于实现上述方法中由STA实现的相应的功能为了简洁,在此不再赘述。FIG12 is a schematic block diagram of a wireless communication system 700 provided in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG12 , the communication system 700 includes an AP 710, a relay communication device 720, and a STA 730. The AP 710 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the AP in the above-described method, the relay communication device 720 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the relay communication device in the above-described method, and the STA 730 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the STA in the above-described method. For the sake of brevity, these functions are not further described here.
应理解,本申请实施例的处理器可能是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。It should be understood that the processor of the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities. During implementation, each step of the above method embodiment may be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or software instructions.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序。It is understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. It should be noted that the memory of the systems and methods described herein is intended to include, but is not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory. The embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program.
可选的,该计算机可读存储介质可应用于本申请实施例中的中继通信设备,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由中继通信设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。可选地,该计算机可读存储介质可应用于本申请实施例中的AP,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由AP实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。可选地,该计算机可读存储介质可应用于本申请实施例中的STA,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由STA实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer-readable storage medium may be applied to the relay communication device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program causes the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the relay communication device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, these processes are not described in detail here. Optionally, the computer-readable storage medium may be applied to the AP in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program causes the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the AP in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, these processes are not described in detail here. Optionally, the computer-readable storage medium may be applied to the STA in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program causes the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the STA in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, these processes are not described in detail here.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序指令。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, including computer program instructions.
可选的,该计算机程序产品可应用于本申请实施例中的中继通信设备,并且该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由中继通信设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。可选地,该计算机程序产品可应用于本申请实施例中的AP,并且该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由AP实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。可选地,该计算机程序产品可应用于本申请实施例中的STA,并且该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由STA实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program product may be applied to the relay communication device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program instructions cause a computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the relay communication device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, these instructions are not described in detail here. Optionally, the computer program product may be applied to the AP in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program instructions cause a computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the AP in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, these instructions are not described in detail here. Optionally, the computer program product may be applied to the STA in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program instructions cause a computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the STA in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, these instructions are not described in detail here.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序。 The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program.
可选的,该计算机程序可应用于本申请实施例中的中继通信设备,当该计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由中继通信设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。可选地,该计算机程序可应用于本申请实施例中的AP,当该计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由AP实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。可选地,该计算机程序可应用于本申请实施例中的STA,当该计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由STA实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program may be applied to the relay communication device in the embodiment of the present application. When the computer program is run on a computer, the computer executes the corresponding processes implemented by the relay communication device in the various methods of the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of brevity, no further details are given here. Optionally, the computer program may be applied to the AP in the embodiment of the present application. When the computer program is run on a computer, the computer executes the corresponding processes implemented by the AP in the various methods of the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of brevity, no further details are given here. Optionally, the computer program may be applied to the STA in the embodiment of the present application. When the computer program is run on a computer, the computer executes the corresponding processes implemented by the STA in the various methods of the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of brevity, no further details are given here.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional and technical personnel can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应所述以权利要求的保护范围为准。 The above description is merely a specific embodiment of the present application, but the scope of protection of the present application is not limited thereto. Any changes or substitutions that can be easily conceived by a person skilled in the art within the technical scope disclosed in the present application should be included in the scope of protection of the present application. Therefore, the scope of protection of the present application should be based on the scope of protection of the claims.
Claims (123)
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2024/083916 WO2025199767A1 (en) | 2024-03-26 | 2024-03-26 | Multi-link device roaming-based communication method, multi-link device roaming-based context migration method, multi-link device roaming-based information conversion method and wireless communication device |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2024/083916 WO2025199767A1 (en) | 2024-03-26 | 2024-03-26 | Multi-link device roaming-based communication method, multi-link device roaming-based context migration method, multi-link device roaming-based information conversion method and wireless communication device |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025199767A1 true WO2025199767A1 (en) | 2025-10-02 |
Family
ID=97218043
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2024/083916 Pending WO2025199767A1 (en) | 2024-03-26 | 2024-03-26 | Multi-link device roaming-based communication method, multi-link device roaming-based context migration method, multi-link device roaming-based information conversion method and wireless communication device |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2025199767A1 (en) |
Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN111741500A (en) * | 2020-08-03 | 2020-10-02 | 成都极米科技股份有限公司 | Roaming method in multilink scene, multilink device and storage medium |
| CN113747502A (en) * | 2020-05-27 | 2021-12-03 | 华为技术有限公司 | Multi-link test association method and related device |
| CN114071640A (en) * | 2020-07-31 | 2022-02-18 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method, device and system in wireless local area network |
-
2024
- 2024-03-26 WO PCT/CN2024/083916 patent/WO2025199767A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN113747502A (en) * | 2020-05-27 | 2021-12-03 | 华为技术有限公司 | Multi-link test association method and related device |
| CN114071640A (en) * | 2020-07-31 | 2022-02-18 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method, device and system in wireless local area network |
| CN111741500A (en) * | 2020-08-03 | 2020-10-02 | 成都极米科技股份有限公司 | Roaming method in multilink scene, multilink device and storage medium |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US10939333B2 (en) | Communication method and communications apparatus to implement a network slice based service in a central unit (CU)-distributed unit (DU) architecture | |
| US12425945B2 (en) | Method for sidelink relay communication under dual connectivity | |
| US9161379B2 (en) | Method and apparatus for transmitting data in DLS wireless network | |
| US10251084B2 (en) | Method for multi-rat scheduling and apparatus therefor in system in which heterogeneous wireless communication technologies are utilized | |
| US10979942B2 (en) | Data transmission method, network device, and terminal device | |
| EP2744260B1 (en) | Data transmission method and device | |
| WO2023108534A1 (en) | Methods and apparatus of sidelink relay based data transmission with multiple paths | |
| WO2022052851A1 (en) | Quality of service (qos) monitoring method | |
| EP3664507B1 (en) | Communication methods for a master base station and a terminal | |
| CN115022865A (en) | Communication method and device | |
| US20230362596A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| CN105850214A (en) | Wireless network scheduling method, accessing device and wireless network | |
| US20190014498A1 (en) | Method and device for 3gpp-wlan aggregation | |
| US20140162631A1 (en) | Load sharing method, base station, user equipment, load sharing node, and system | |
| CN116547922A (en) | Beam management method of physical cell and related device | |
| WO2025199767A1 (en) | Multi-link device roaming-based communication method, multi-link device roaming-based context migration method, multi-link device roaming-based information conversion method and wireless communication device | |
| US12219640B2 (en) | Managing sidelink and non-sidelink information | |
| CN120153707A (en) | Alternative Conditional Switching Configuration with Single Connection | |
| CN117397291A (en) | Wireless communication method, terminal equipment and network equipment | |
| WO2023216770A1 (en) | Resource state interaction method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2023140332A1 (en) | Communication control method | |
| EP4233422A1 (en) | Logical channel prioritization | |
| CN115699816B (en) | Method for sidelink relay communication under dual connectivity | |
| WO2025025177A1 (en) | A method to solve timeout problem of pdu session split | |
| WO2025148301A1 (en) | User-plane methods in layer- 1 /layer-2 triggered mobility |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 24931859 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |